CVP-409GP/409/407 Owner's Manual

CVP-409 / 407 OWNER’S MANUAL

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- products may have either labels similar to the graphics rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these place. The average life span of this type of battery is graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these approximately five years. When replacement becomes graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions necessary, contact a qualified service representative to indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety perform the replacement. instruction section. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away CAUTION from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the DO NOT OPEN servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. dispose of these parts for you. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid- ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. The exclamation point within the NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- equilateral triangle is intended to alert edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the the user to the presence of important unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man- operating and maintenance (servic- ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon- ing) instructions in the literature sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult accompanying the product. your dealer before requesting service. The lightning flash with arrowhead NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- symbol, within the equilateral trian- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, gle, is intended to alert the user to the serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on presence of uninsulated “dangerous this plate. You should record the model number, serial voltage” within the product’s enclo- number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided sure that may be of sufficient magni- below and retain this manual as a permanent record of tude to constitute a risk of electrical your purchase. shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products CVP-409GP CVP-409/407 are tested and approved by an independent safety testing (grand piano type) laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be Model correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Serial No. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally Purchase Date friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

92-469 1 (bottom)

PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the accumulated on it. power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything Fire warning over it. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or If you notice any abnormality modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio outlet. may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally Assembly fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is damage to the instrument or even injury. easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

(1)B-13 1/2

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 3

Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all over. components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step- of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. Maintenance • (CVP-409 including grand piano type) Do not attempt to adjust the bench height • In the case of a model with a polished finish, gently remove dust and dirt with a while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism instrument's finish. or even injury. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping periodically using the included tool. cloths. • During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur Saving data and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any Saving and backing up your data water off immediately with a soft cloth. • The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the USER tab display (page 26), USB storage Handling caution device (USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc). • Recorded/Edited Songs (page 42, 143, 158) •Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Created/Edited Styles (page 117) • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key • Edited Voices (page 99) cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and • Memorized One Touch Settings (page 51) unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected • Edited MIDI settings (page 196) by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Moreover, the above-mentioned data can be saved all at once. Refer to page 76. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might Data in the USER tab display (page 26) may be lost due to malfunction or discolor the panel or keyboard. incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (USB flash • In the case of a model with a polished finish, bumping the surface of the memory/floppy disk, etc). instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

(1)B-13 2/2

4 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of the following sections.

Owner’s Manual Introduction (page 10)...... Please read this section ﬁrst. Quick Guide (page 23)...... This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 63)...... This section explains how to use the basic operations including display- based controls. Reference (page 78) ...... This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions. Appendix (page 205)...... This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and Speciﬁcations.

Data List Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

•The models CVP-409/407 will be referred to as the CVP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. •The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. •The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. •This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without lim- itation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

•The photos of the harpsichord, bandoneon, hackbrett, music box, dulcimer and cimbalom, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan (Collection for Organolgy), Kunitachi College of Music. •The following instruments, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments: balafon, gender, kalimba, kanoon, santur, gamelan gong, harp, hand bell, bagpipe, banjo, carillon, mandolin, oud, pan ﬂute, pungi, rabab, shanai, sitar, steel drum, and tambra. •This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from IVL Audio Inc. •The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. •This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied. This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

Trademarks: • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 5

Accessories

Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration

“50 greats for the Piano” Music Book

Owner’s Manual

Data List

The following items may be included or optional, depending on your locale:

Bench

■ Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

■ Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you ﬁrst took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument.

After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function (page 82). • Place the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm away from the wall. (This is not necessary for the CVP-409 grand piano type.) • (When using the SPATIAL EFFECT) Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 83).

6 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Table of Contents

Introduction Convenient Functions for Karaoke ...... 56 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Enhanced Realism and Natural Own Performance ...... 58 Expressiveness ...... 10 Recording Your Performance as Audio Panel Controls ...... 12 (USB Audio Recorder) ...... 60 Playing the Keyboard ...... 14 Recording Your Performance as Audio ...... 60 Playing Back the Recorded Performance ...... 62 Setting Up ...... 16 Music Rest ...... 16 Sheet Music Braces ...... 16 Lid (CVP-409 grand piano type) ...... 16 Basic Operation Using Headphones ...... 17 Basic Operation ...... 63 Changing the Display Language ...... 18 Display Settings ...... 18 Selecting Message Language ...... 63 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and The Messages Shown in the Display ...... 63 Floppy Disks ...... 21 Instant Selection of the Displays Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash —Direct Access ...... 64 Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) ...... 22 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) ...... 65 Main Display ...... 65 File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Quick Guide ...... 23 Operation ...... 66 File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display ... 68 Playing the Demos ...... 23 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings ... 74 Operations in the Basic Displays ...... 25 Restoring the Factory-programmed System ...... 74 Operation of the Main Display ...... 25 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Operation of the File Selection Display ...... 26 Independently by Item ...... 75 Operation of the Function Display ...... 27 Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Playing Voices ...... 28 Single File ...... 75 Playing the Piano Voice ...... 28 Data Backup ...... 76 Playing Various Voices ...... 32 Backup procedure ...... 77 Practicing with the Songs ...... 35 Playing Back Songs Before Practicing ...... 35 Displaying Music Notation (Score) ...... 38 Reference One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ...... 39 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ...... 41 Recording Your Performance ...... 42 Using, Creating and Editing Voices ..78 Voice Characteristics ...... 78 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology ...... 43 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously ...... 79 Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) ...... 79 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) ...... 44 (Right 1 and 2 Parts) ...... 80 Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Accompaniment Feature ...... 45 Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) ...... 81 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound —Music Finder ...... 52 (iAFC) ...... 82 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style Adjusting the iAFC Depth ...... 82 (Repertoire) ...... 53 Calibrating the iAFC Settings ...... 83 Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) Restoring the Default Calibration Setting or Your Own Performance ...... 54 [iAFC Default] ...... 84 Connecting a Microphone ...... 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display ...... 55

Various display pages and menus appear on the LCD display of this instrument, indicating the functions and operations. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up these functions. The example shorthand below describes a four step operation: 1) press the [FUNCTION] button, 2) press the [D] button to select the Controller page, 3) press the TAB [®] button to select the Keyboard/Panel page, and 4) press the [A] button to select the Initial Touch parameter. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 7

Changing Pitch ...... 84 Using a Microphone ...... 167 Transpose ...... 84 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters ...... 167 Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument ...... 84 Scale Tuning ...... 84 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Sound ...... 170 Keyboard ...... 86 Talk Setting ...... 174 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance Connecting the Clavinova Directly (MIXING CONSOLE) ...... 88 Basic Procedure ...... 88 to the Internet ...... 176 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet .. 176 Voice Creating (Sound Creator) ...... 99 Basic Procedure ...... 99 Accessing the Special Website ...... 177 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ...... 103 Operations in the Special Website ...... 177 Scrolling the Display ...... 177 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Following Links ...... 178 Accompaniment Styles ...... 107 Entering Characters ...... 178 Style Characteristics ...... 107 Return to the Previous Web Page ...... 178 Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Selecting a Chord Fingering Type ...... 107 Web Page ...... 179 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Purchasing and Downloading Data ...... 180 Style ...... 108 Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages .... 180 About the Internet Settings Display ...... 183 Style Playback-related Settings ...... 109 Changing the Home Page ...... 186 Split Point Settings ...... 111 Initializing Internet Settings ...... 187 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Glossary of Internet Terms ...... 188 Style (MIXING CONSOLE) ...... 112 Using Your Instrument with Other Convenient Music Finder feature ...... 112 Searching the Records ...... 112 Devices ...... 189 Creating a Set of Favorite Records ...... 114 Using Headphones (1 [PHONES] jacks) ...... 189 Editing Records ...... 114 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar Saving the Record ...... 115 (2 [MIC./LINE IN] jack) ...... 189 Style Creator ...... 117 Connecting Audio & Video Devices (345) .. 189 Style Structure ...... 117 Using External Audio Devices for playback and Creating a Style ...... 118 Recording (3 [AUX OUT] Jacks, [AUX OUT Editing the Created Style ...... 123 (LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks) ...... 189 Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in Registering and Recalling Custom Speakers (4 [AUX IN] Jacks) ...... 190 Panel Setups Showing the Instrument’s Display Contents on an —Registration Memory ...... 131 External Monitor Registering and Saving Custom Panel (5 [VIDEO OUT] Terminal, [RGB OUT] Terminal) .. 190 Setups ...... 131 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller Recalling the Registered Panel Setups ...... 132 (6 [AUX PEDAL] jack) ...... 191 Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal ... 191 Panel Setup ...... 133 Connecting External MIDI Devices Disabling Recall of Specific Items (7 [MIDI] Terminals) ...... 194 (Freeze Function) ...... 133 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order Connecting a Computer, USB Device, —Registration Sequence ...... 134 or Internet (789)) ...... 194 Connecting a Computer Using, Creating and Editing Songs ...136 (7 [MIDI] and 8 [USB TO HOST] Terminals) ..... 194 Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor and USB Compatible Song Types ...... 136 Storage Device Operations for Song Playback ...... 137 (9 via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal) ...... 195 ) Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Connect to the Internet ( [LAN] Port) ...... 196 Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) ...... 140 What is MIDI? ...... 196 Using the Practice Function (Guide) ...... 141 What You Can Do With MIDI ...... 199 Selecting the Guide Function Type ...... 141 MIDI Settings ...... 200 Recording Your Performance ...... 143 Basic Operation ...... 200 Recording Methods ...... 143 Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates ...... 201 Editing a Recorded Song ...... 158 MIDI System Settings ...... 202

8 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual MIDI Transmit Settings ...... 202 MIDI Receive Settings...... 203 Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Introduction Receive ...... 203 Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ...... 204 Using

Y Quick Guide our

Appendix Instrument Troubleshooting ...... 205 CVP-409 grand piano type: Keyboard Stand

Assembly ...... 210 Basic Operation with

CVP-409/407: Keyboard Stand Assembly ..... 213 Other Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) .. 216

Devices Specifications ...... 217 Reference Index ...... 219 Using, Creating and Editing Voices Panel Button Chart ...... 222

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Using a Microphone

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

Appendix

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 9 Enhanced Realism and Natural Expressiveness

Authentic Acoustic Piano-like Touch

NW (Natural Wood) with Synthetic ivory keytops (CVP-409 including grand piano type) This is the ﬁrst Clavinova featuring a keyboard that has the feel of real ivory. The special Natural Wood keyboard of the CVP-409 uses real-wood white keys. The key surface is soft and slightly porous, giving the keys added grip and a natural friction that lets you play easily. The authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic key-

Introduction boards, it makes you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. This specially crafted keyboard lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos, such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally.

NW (Natural Wood) Keyboard (CVP-407) The special Natural Wood keyboard of the CVP-407 uses real-wood white keys, to repro- duce as closely as possible the experience of playing an actual acoustic grand piano. The authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic keyboards, realis- tically recreating the hardness of the keys, the balance between the weight of the key and hammer, and the characteristic weight gradations of the keys – heavy in the low end, light in the high register – to make you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. Moreover, this specially crafted keyboard lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos, such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally.

The Acoustic Ambience of a Grand Piano —with the iAFC Feature

Turn on the iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if you’re playing on stage in a concert hall. Use the Spatial Effect to rec- reate and emphasize the natural sounds of true acoustic instruments. The overall sound is deeper and more resonant, especially when using the damper pedal (Dynamic Damper Effect).

SPATIAL Effect (greater depth)SPATIAL Effect (less depth) DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect The Spatial Effect, which recreates the natural sounds of true acoustic instruments, is not applied to the default setting. For more details about iAFC, see page 82.

Audio Recording

Recording Your Performance as Audio...... page 60 You can record your performance as audio data to a USB ﬂash memory. Con- nect a microphone or guitar to the instrument and enjoy recording a guitar and keyboard performance together, or record your singing along with Song playback (in karaoke fashion).

10 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Playing the Instrument

Playing Piano Voices ...... page 28

With just the press of a button, you can reconﬁgure the entire instrument for Introduction optimum piano performance, no matter what settings you’ve made from the panel. Now you can enjoy performing and practicing with authentic grand piano sounds and response—instantly.

Playing Other Instrument Voices ...... page 32 The instrument gives you not only various realistic piano Voices, but also features an exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments, both acoustic and electronic.

Perform Along with a Full Band —Song Playback...... page 35 Play along with previously recorded Song data, and ﬁll out your solo performance with the sounds and arrangement of an entire band or orchestra.

Ease in Playing Backing Parts with Songs, —performance assistant technology...... page 43 The new performance assistant technology features make it exceptionally easy to play professional-sounding backing parts along with Song playback.

Playing Melodies along with Auto Accompaniment, —Style Playback ...... page 44 Use the Style playback features to automatically produce full backing parts and accompaniment, while you play melodies on top. It’s like having an expert ensemble playing behind you. Select an accompaniment Style—such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc.— and let the instrument be your backing band!

Practicing

Displaying and Playing along with the Music Score ...... page 59 While playing back a Song, you can have the music score (notation) automatically shown on the display—an exceptionally convenient tool for learning and practicing pieces.

Guide Lamps...... page 39 The key guide lamps are also helpful in learning and practicing, since they indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold them down.

Recording Your Performance...... page 42 The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to internal memory or a USB storage device. This, too, is an excellent practice tool, letting you listen back to your playing and spot your strong and weak points.

Expand Your Song Collection

Internet Direct Connection...... page 176 The instrument also connects directly to the Internet, letting you download Song data from special websites, and save them to internal memory or a USB storage device.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls Introduction

1 [POWER] switch ...... P. 14 Q [EXIT] button...... P. 26 2 [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal...... P. 22 R [DATA ENTRY] dial ...... P. 67 3 [MASTER VOLUME] dial...... P. 15 S [ENTER] button ...... P. 67 4 [DEMO] button...... P. 23 T [USB] button ...... P. 67 U [USER] button ...... P. 67 METRONOME 5 [ON/OFF] button ...... P. 30 PART ON/OFF V [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button ...... P. 79 TRANSPOSE W [SPLIT (LEFT)] button...... P. 79 6 [–] [+] buttons...... P. 56

TEMPO X [FUNCTION] button ...... P. 27 7 [TAP TEMPO] button...... P. 47 Y [INTERNET] button ...... P. 176 8 [–] [+] buttons...... P. 31 SONG CONTROL STYLE CONTROL Z [SONG SELECT] button...... P. 35 9 STYLE category selection buttons...... P. 45 [ [REC] button ...... P. 42 0 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ...... P. 46 \ [STOP] button ...... P. 35 A [AUTO FILL IN] button ...... P. 48 ] [PLAY/PAUSE] button ...... P. 35 B INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ...... P. 47 ^ [REW]/[FF] buttons...... P. 138 C MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] buttons ...... P. 48 a [EXTRA TRACKS] button...... P. 144 D [BREAK] button...... P. 48 b [TRACK 2 (L)] button...... P. 41 E ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ...... P. 48 c [TRACK 1 (R)] button...... P. 39 F [SYNC STOP] button...... P. 48 d [SCORE] button...... P. 38 G [SYNC START] button ...... P. 47 e [LYRICS/TEXT] button...... P. 55 H [START/STOP] button...... P. 47 f [GUIDE] button...... P. 39 I [MUSIC FINDER] button...... P. 52 g [REPEAT] button...... P. 41

J [LCD CONTRAST] knob ...... P. 18 PIANO Setting h [PIANO RESET] button ...... P. 29 K [A]–[J] buttons...... P. 25 L [DIRECT ACCESS] button...... P. 64 REGISTRATION MEMORY M [MIXING CONSOLE] button...... P. 88 i REGIST BANK [+] [–] buttons ...... P. 132 N [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button ...... P. 109, 143 j [MEMORY] button ...... P. 131 O [1π†]–[8π†] buttons ...... P. 25 k [1]–[8] buttons ...... P. 131 P TAB [√][®] buttons...... P. 26

12 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Introduction

VOICE CONTROL l VOICE category selection buttons ...... P. 32 m [VOICE EFFECT] button ...... P. 86

ONE TOUCH SETTING n [1]–[4] buttons...... P. 50 o [OTS LINK] button ...... P. 51 p Drum Kit icons...... Data List (Drum/key Assignment List)

Pedals q Left pedal...... P. 30 r Sostenuto pedal ...... P. 30 s Damper pedal...... P. 30 t Keyboard guide lamps ...... P. 39 u Mic signal/over lamps ...... P. 54

For quick reference, also see the alphabetically sorted “Panel Button Chart” on page 222. For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom left of the instrument, see page 189. The [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is also located on the bottom left of the instrument.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 13

Playing the Keyboard

1 Connecting the power cable First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the instrument, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it Introduction is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching ﬁn- gers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the (The shape of the plug and outlet dif- cover and the unit. fer depending on locale.)

CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on 2 Opening the key cover top of the key cover. Small Using the hand grip on the front, lift open the key cover. objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers when opening the cover.

3 Turning the power on Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

The power indicator lights up.

14 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 4 Playing the keyboard Play the keyboard to produce sound. Introduction

Adjusting the volume While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER VOLUME] located at the left of the panel.

5 Turning the power off Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power off. The screen and the power indicator turn off.

6 Closing the key cover Grip the metal rim at the top of the panel, and close the key cover.

CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers when closing the cover.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 15 Setting Up

Music Rest To Raise the Music Rest: CVP-409 grand CAUTION CVP-409 grand piano type piano type When raising or lowering the 1 Pull the music rest up and toward music rest, do not release yourself as far as it will go. your hands from the music rest until it is all the way up or 2 Flip down the two metal supports at down. the left and the right on the rear of the Introduction music rest.

3 Lower the music rest so that it rests on CVP-409/407 the metal supports. CVP-409/407 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. CAUTION When raised, the music rest is fixed at a certain Before lowering the music angle and cannot be adjusted. rest, close the sheet music braces (see below). To Lower the Music Rest: CVP-409 grand The music rest will not close CVP-409 grand piano type piano type unless the sheet music braces are also closed. 1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2 Raise the two metal supports until they are flat against the rear surface of the music rest. CVP-409/407 3 Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CVP-409/407 Lift the music rest slightly, then turn it Close the sheet back slowly. music braces CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers. Sheet Music Braces These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To Open To Close

Lid (CVP-409 grand piano type) One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to open the lid to the desired angle. ■ To open the lid: 2 1 Raise the music rest as described in “Music Rest” above. 3 1 To turn on the iAFC (page 82), 2 Raise and hold the right side of the lid open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. (viewed from the keyboard end of the When the lid is closed or open instrument). with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on. 3 Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay ﬁts into the recess in the lid.

16 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Using Headphones

For the longer stay, use the inner recess, and for the shorter stay, use the outer recess to support the lid. Introduction Longer stay Shorter stay CAUTION •Make sure that the end of the stay ﬁts securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess, the lid may fall, causing damage or injury. • Be careful that you or oth- ■ To close the lid: 1 ers do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The 1 Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the stay may be bumped out of lid. 3 the lid recess causing the lid to fall. 2 Hold the lid in its raised position and 2 • Be careful to avoid catching lower the lid stay. ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s) when 3 Carefully lower the lid. raising or lowering the lid.

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the CAUTION [PHONES] jacks located on the bottom left Do not listen with the head- of the instrument. phones at high volume for Two sets of standard stereo headphones long periods of time. Doing can be connected. (If you are using only so may cause hearing loss.

INPUT MIC. VOLUME LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES one pair of headphones, you can plug MIN MAX them into either of these jacks.)

Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the instrument CAUTION package so that you can hang the headphones on the Do not hang anything other instrument. Install the headphone hanger using than the headphones on the included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure. hanger. Otherwise, the instrument or the hanger may be damaged.

Outputting sound from the speaker while headphones are connected

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]→ [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 2 2 Press the [3π†]/[4π†] (SPEAKER) button to select “ON.”

Outputting sound only from the headphones From the display called up in step 1 above, press the [3π†]/[4π†] (SPEAKER) button to select “OFF.” When “OFF” is selected, the speakers will not sound and you can only hear the instrument sound via the headphones.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 17 Changing the Display Language

Changing the Display Language This determines the language used in the display for messages, ﬁle names, and character input.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER

π† π† Introduction 2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select a language. To return to the original display, press the [EXIT] button.

Display Settings Adjusting the Contrast of the Display

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob located to the left of the display.

18 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Display Settings

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display

Adjust the brightness of the display.

1 Call up the operation display. Introduction [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 2

2 Press the [2π†] button to adjust the brightness of the display.

Selecting a Picture for the Main Display Back- ground

This function lets you select your favorite picture to be used as background for the Main display (page 25).

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER

2 Press the [J] (MAIN PICTURE) button to call up the Picture Selection Display.

3 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a picture.

J 2

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 19 Display Settings

After selecting, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. The newly selected picture is shown as the background of the Main display.

The explanation about picture Importing a favorite picture for the Main display background compatibility at right applies also to the background of the Even though a variety of pictures are available on the Preset drive, you can Song Lyrics display. load your own favorite picture data from USB storage device (USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc) to the instrument for use as background.

Introduction Make sure to use images no larger than 640 x 480 pixels. If you select a picture file on the USB storage device (USB flash memory/ floppy disk, etc), the background may take some time to appear. If you want to reduce this time, save the background from the USB drive to the USER drive of the Picture Selection display. If you select a picture file on the USB drive, the selected background will not be displayed when the power is turned on again unless the same media containing the data has been inserted into the drive.

Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display

You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that ﬁrst appears when the power is turned on).

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER

2 Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name display. Refer to page 73 for character-entry details.

Displaying the version number To check the version number of this instrument, press the [7π†]/[8π†] (VERSION) buttons in the display in step 1 above. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display.

20 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

(The floppy disk drive is optional. For instructions Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head on installing the floppy disk drive, see page 216.) • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve cre- employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, ated on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of load data from floppy disk to the instrument. magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventu- Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with Introduction ally cause read and write errors. care. Follow the important precautions below. •To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail- Floppy Disk Compatibility able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail- • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. ability of proper headcleaning disks.

Formatting a Floppy Disk About Floppy Disks

• If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or Handle floppy disks with care, and fol- old disks that have been used with other devices, you low these precautions: may need to format them. For details on how to format a • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply disk, see page 68. Keep in mind that all data on the disk pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check before- in their protective cases when they are not in use. hand whether or not the disk contains important data. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high n or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq- Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable uids. as is on other devices. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or hous- upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards ing. the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in eject button pops out. the proper location. n Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): •To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab Removing a Floppy Disk open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write- • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject Write-protect tab open button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to (protect position) eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data.

CAUTION Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 21 Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] termi- Using USB Storage Devices nal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you important precautions below. can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as n well as read data from the connected device. For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to n Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the owner’s manual of the USB device. the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

Compatible USB devices The number of USB storage device to be Introduction used • USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) Up to two USB storage devices can be connected to the • USB hub [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. • USB-LAN adaptor The number of USB storage devices that can be used The instrument does not necessarily support all commer- simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can rec- operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur- ognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Formatting USB storage media n Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation Connecting USB device (page 68).

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO CAUTION DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does device is appropriate and that it is connected in the not contain important data. Proceed with caution, espe- proper direction. cially when connecting multiple USB storage media. CAUTION When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the Protecting your data (write-protect) key cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB device may be damaged. To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device • If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, time to a terminal, you should use a USB hub device. make sure to disable write-protect. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the Connecting/removing USB storage USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the device USB hub. Before removing the media from the device, make sure •Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with Save, Copy and Delete operations). the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

22 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Quick Guide Playing the Demos The Demos are more than just songs—they also provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features, functions and operations of the instrument. In a way, the Demos are an interactive “mini-manual”—complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you. Quick Guide

1 Select the desired Language.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J]UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER

2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to select the desired language.

2 Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos. Demos will play back continuously until stopped.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback. When the Demo stops, the display returns to the MAIN display (page 65).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 23 Quick Guide 24 Showing SpecificDemoTopics CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 2 1 3 press the[J]button. To Press oneofthe[A]–[I]buttonstoshowaspecificDemo. Press the[7 Press the[EXIT]buttontoexitfromDemo. to thescreennumber. Press a[ one screen. When theDemohasmorethan returnback tothepreviousdisplay, π† π π π π ] buttoncorresponding † † † † ]/[8 π π π π † † † † ] buttonsintheDemodisplaytocallupspecific Demomenu. Quick Guide 25 1 3 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s 2 3 1 See below. page 26 page 27 ] button will π ➤ ] buttons correspond to ➤ ] buttons π† † † † † ➤ π π π π ]–[8 ]–[8

π† † † † † About information in the Main display See page 65. π π π π

oice (RIGHT 1) selection display will appear oice (RIGHT 1) selection display he [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings he [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings he [1 or example, pressing the [1 or example, press the [F] button, and the or example, press the [F] button, and the the parameters which are indicated above the are indicated above which the parameters buttons. F [A]–[J] buttons T indicated next to the buttons. F V in the display. [1 Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main to way a convenient Here’s Simply press the other display: from any display button, then the [EXIT] button. ACCESS] [DIRECT T increase the Song (page 35) volume. [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT] buttons start with, you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. There are Quick Guide. There appear in the basic displays that a little about the you should know start with, he Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that (It is the same display important information for the instrument the basic settings and shows he Main display 1 n 2 Operation of the Main Display Operation T function from pages related to the displayed also call up display can is turned on.).You the instrument appears when the Main display. Main display Main display To displays: three basic File selection display Function display Operations in the Basic Displays the Basic in Operations 3 Quick Guide 26 In theexamplehere,we’llcallupanduseSongSelectiondisplay. In theFile Selectiondisplay, you canselectthe Voice (page28)/Song( Operation oftheFileSelectionDisplay CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 6 5 4 3 2 1 Press the[EXIT]button toreturnthepreviousdisplay. Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaSong. Select apage(ifthedisplayhasseveralpages). Press the[8 to selectafolder. at right).Pressoneofthe[A]–[J]buttons appear inthedisplay (seetheillustration folder. Inthiscase,thefolder(s)will Several Songsmay betogetherina Select afolder(ifnecessary). n storage device,such asUSBflashmemory/floppy diskdrive, etc.,which ...... USB isconnected USB memorythatallows bothreadingandwritingofdata...... Internal USER Internalmemorytowhich thepreprogrammed dataareinstalledaspresetdata...... PRESET About PRESET/USER/USB Press theTAB [ Press the[SONGSELECT]buttontocallupSongSelectiondisplay. Y tions areshown atthebottomofdisplay. Pressoneofthe[1 When thedrive containsmorethanten Songs, thedisplay isdivided upintoseveral pages. The pageindica- the nexthighestlevel folder. ou canalsoselectaSongby usingthe[DATA ENTRY] dial,thenpressthe[ENTER]buttontoexecute. storage device.” Hereafter inthismanual,any USBstorage devicesuch asUSBflashmemory/floppy disk,etc.willbereferredtoas“USB 1 π ] (UP)buttontocallup to the[USB TO DEVICE]terminal. √ ][ ® 3, ] buttonstoselectthedesireddrive(PRESET/USER/USB).

5 4 page 35 π ]–[6 )/Style (page44),etc. π ] buttonstoselectapage. 3, 2

5 Quick Guide 27 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] button to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab. ] button to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL ® When the setting is further divided into When the setting is further divided additional settings, a list will be shown in the display. When the selected category is further into sub-categories, the tab(s) divided in the display. will be shown Categories of detailed settings are Categories of detailed shown. Press the TAB [ Press the TAB Press the [D] button to select the categoryPress the [D] button to select the CONTROLLER. Press the [FUNCTION] button. Press the [FUNCTION] 3 2 1 Operation of the Function Display the Function of Operation settings. can make detailed you display, In the Function setting display. sensitivity touch up and use the keyboard here, we’ll call In the example Quick Guide 28 Here, we’llcallupandplay thepianovoice. You canplay thepianovoice usingthepedalsormetronome. Playing thePianoVoice The instrumentfeaturesavarietyofVoices, includingexceptionallyrealisticpianoVoices. Playing Voices CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual KEYBOARD/PANEL F displays andfunctions. T or example,theinstructionsabove canbeindicatedinshorthandas:[FUNCTION] hroughout thismanual,arrows areusedintheinstructions,indicatingshorthandprocessofcallingupcertain (page 30) [ON/OFF] button METRONOME 4 5 Press the[A]buttontoselect“1INITIALTOUCH.” F Press the[1 or detailsonthetouch sensitivity settings,see page 29. → [A]1INITIAL TOUCH. π π π π † † † † ]/[2 π π π π † † † † ] buttontoselecttouchsensitivityforthekeyboard. V OICE category selectionbuttonsOICE category (page 32) 4 5 (page 29) [PIANO RESET]button →

[D] CONTROLLER → T AB [ ® ] Quick Guide 29 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] buttons. When ] buttons. † ] KEYBOARD/ ]–[7 ® † AB [ T → ] buttons to specify the touch response. ] buttons to specify the touch π† ] button. ]/[2 [D] CONTROLLER π† → for players with a heavy touch. touch. with a heavy for players with a light touch. ing strength. Best for players π† [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH [A] 1 INITIAL hen you do not want to apply touch sensitivity, set Touch to OFF for Touch set sensitivity, to apply touch want do not hen you → he touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices. have settings may sensitivity he touch his setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. his setting does not change ouch is set to OFF, you can specify the fixed volume level by press- by level can specify the fixed volume you is set to OFF, ouch turn Piano Lock off, press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button again for three seconds or turn Piano Lock off, press and hold ing the [4 T the corresponding parts by pressing the [5 the corresponding parts by •T •T •W To longer. Press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel for three seconds Press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] you to enable Piano Lock. until a message appears prompting or longer, Piano Lock. Press the [F] (OK) button to enable ANEL HARD 2..... Best to produce high volume. strong playing Requires HARD 1..... for high volume. strong playing moderately Requires NORMAL... response. Standard touch SOFT 1...... strength. playing with moderate Produces high volume SOFT 2...... with light play- even high volume Produces relatively Call up the operation display: Call up the operation [FUNCTION] Press the [1 3 1 2 Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel. [PIANO RESET] button Press the piano-shaped P ou can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). The touch touch The the keys). play you the sound responds to the way response of the instrument (how ou can adjust the touch n 1 2 Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard Setting the touch sensitivity of the Y Voices. type becomes the common setting for all sensitivity a single button press. a single button he convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t inadvertently change the settings by the settings by change inadvertently don’t that you the piano so “lock” function lets you Piano Lock he convenient his convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconfigures the entire instrument for optimum entire instrument for the automatically reconfigures completely and easy-to-use feature his convenient, T buttons are if other in the piano mode, even the instrument stays Once locked, pressing another button on the panel. piano performance. 35) during your (page from accidentally starting a Song you pressed—preventing Piano Lock Function One-touch Piano Play Piano One-touch T up the piano settings can instantly call you made from the panel, settings you’ve what No matter piano performance. by Quick Guide 30 c T Using theMetronome used tocontrolvarious functionsassigned(page 191). An optional Yamaha footcontroller(FC7)orfootswitch (FC4or FC5)canbeconnectedtothe AUX PEDAL jack and ● n T and slightlychanges thetimbreofnotesyou play. When thePianovoice isselected,pressingthispedalreducesthevolume ● held. All subsequentnoteswillnotsustain. w If you play anoteorchord onthekeyboardandpresssostenutopedal ● after releasingthekeys. actual acousticpiano,lettingyou sustainthesoundofvoices even T ● T Using thePedals n n heck how aspecifictemposounds. he metronomeprovides aclick sound,giving you anaccurate tempoguidewhen you practice, orlettingyou hearand he settingsassignedtothispedalmay differdependingontheselected Voice. he damperpedalperformsthesamefunctionasonan he instrumentfeaturesthreepedals. hile holdingthenote(s),noteswillsustainaslongpedalis CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Foot Controller/Footswitch Left Pedal Sostenuto Pedal(Center) Damper Pedal(Right) like controllingtheSuper Articulation voices (page78)orstartingandstoppingtheStyle( Y Making SettingsforthePedals ou canassignoneofthevarious functionstothethreepedalsoranoptionalfootcontroller/footswitch, doingthings • • 2 1 • • T he depthoftheleftpedaleffectcanbeadjusted(page101). Certain Voices inthe“PERCUSSION&DRUMKIT,” “GM&XG”and“GM2” Some Voices may soundcontinuouslyorhave alongdecay afterthenotes Certain Voices inthe“PERCUSSION&DRUMKIT”,“GM&XG”and“GM2” Certain Voices, such as[STRINGS] or[BRASS],sustaincontinuouslywhen groups may notbeaffectedby useofthedamperpedal. have beenreleasedwhile thedamperpedalisheld. groups may notbeaffectedby useofthesostenutopedal. the sostenutopedalispressed. To Press theMETRONOME[ON/OFF]buttontostart themetronome. stopthemetronome,pressMETRONOME [ON/OFF] buttonagain. Left Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Damper Pedal long asyou holdthepedal. note(s), thenoteswillsustainas pedal herewhileholdingthe When you pressthesostenuto release thepedalhave alongersustain. here, thenotesyou play before you When you pressthedamperpedal page 191 ). Quick Guide 31 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] buttons to set the time. π† ]/[8 π† [B] 2 METRONOME ] buttons. → † † † † π π π π ]–[7 † † † † π π π π ] CONFIG 1 ] CONFIG 2 √ ® sound, with no bell. sound, with bell. ][ AB [ √ T → AB [ T → rench Voice...... rench Count in French apanese Voiceapanese ... Count in Japanese Bell On...... metronome Conventional VoiceEnglish ...... Count in English VoiceGerman .... Count in German J F VoiceSpanish ..... Count in Spanish Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Determines which Bell Off...... metronome Conventional Determines the level of the metronome sound. [J] UTILITY → [J] UTILITY → he number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and range The beats there are in one minute. quarter-note many indicates how he number in the display About the Tempo display About the Tempo T the faster the tempo. higher the value, The 500. TIME SIGNATURE SOUND VOLUME ou can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value. To reset the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]/[+] but- press the reset the tempo, To adjust the value. dial to ENTRY] [DATA ou can also use the Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] Set the parameters by pressing the [2 n display. Tempo Press the [EXIT] button to close the Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo. Press the TEMPO or decrease the value. continuously increase either button lets you Pressing and holding Y tons simultaneously. Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display. pop-up tempo to call up the TEMPO [–]/[+] button Press the 1 2 Call up the operation display. Call up the operation [FUNCTION] TIME) button, and use the [7 Select the [B] (2 POPUP DISPLAY 3 2 1 Set the Popup Display Time Set the Popup Display Time 1 2 Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings Time Determine the Metronome Adjusting the Metronome Tempo the Metronome Adjusting ■ ■ Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound Metronome of the Signature the Time or Setting the Tempo Adjusting Quick Guide 32 n V correspond tothecategoriesofpreset Voices. For example,pressthe[PIANO]buttontodisplay various piano T Playing PresetVoices V T Playing Various Voices he preset Voices arecategorizedandcontainedinappropriatefolders. VOICE categoryselectionbuttonsonthepanel he instrumentfeaturesavariety of Voices such asstringsorwindinstruments,includingexceptionally realisticpiano oices. oices. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 2 1 pressed). Y buttons ispressed). Determining howtheVoice selection selectiondisplayisopened(whenoneoftheVOICEcategory ou canselecthow the Voice selectiondisplay isopened(when oneofthe VOICE categoryselectionbuttonsis how the Voice selectiondisplay isopened. 2 • • Select the[B](2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS)button,andusethe[1 [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperation display. 1 Refer tothe Voice Listintheseparate DataListbooklet. About thevariousVoices Opens the Voice selectiondisplay withthecurrentlyselectedvoice (when oneofthe VOICE categoryselection OPEN ONLY: is turnedon. one ofthe Voice categoryselection buttonsispressed). With thedefaultsettings,OPEN&SELECTfunction Opens the Voice selectiondisplay withthetop(first)voice ofthevoice categoryautomaticallyselected(when OPEN&SELECT: up theVoice selectiondisplay. selectionbuttonstoselect aVoicePress oneoftheVOICE category andcall category T Make surethePART ON/OFF[DUAL(RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)]buttonsareoff. part. Use the[A]/[B]/[F]/[G](RIGHT1)buttonsinMaindisplaytoselectRIGHT1 he Voice selectedhereistheRIGHT1part.For the Voice part,see page 79. → [J]UTILITY → T AB [ √ ][ ® ] CONFIG2 π† ]/[2 π† ] buttonstochange Quick Guide 33 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] (INFORMATION) button. ] (INFORMATION) π [F] VOICE (RIGHT1) VOICE [F] he Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteris- details on the name. For Voice the Preset indicated above are characteristics type and its defining Voice he ou can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. “double-clicking” by to the original display ou can instantly jump back → Restoring the Piano settings Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button. Y T 78. tics, see page ou can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the [7 by Voice for the selected up the information ou can call Select the desired Voice. Select the desired Voice. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive. from the Preset drive Voices favorite your Copy operation. Refer to page 70 for details on the copy Call up the selection display. [USER] n n Play the keyboard. n Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice. buttons to select of the [A]–[J] Press one Y 3 1 2 4 3 Refer to page 131 for details on Registration Memory operations. Refer to page 131 for details on Registration Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the in the Voice to the USER display Save your favorite Voice [USER] button Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION Register your favorite Voice [1]–[8] buttons he instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Voices, covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds— of instrument an exceptionally broad range covering Voices, he instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Recalling your favorite Voices easily Recalling your favorite Voices T seem overwhelming may Voices the sheer number of However, musical application. making it perfect for virtually every methods: there are two Voice, favorite easily recall your To at first. ● ● Quick Guide 34 To Playing theVoice Demos CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual listentothevarious Voices andhearhow theysoundespeciallyincontext,listentothedemosongsforeach Voice. • • T Playing differentVoices simultaneously P Y n Selecting GM/XG/GM2Voices categorized as“GM&XG”/“GM2.” Y Selecting soundeffects To and percussion instrument soundsonthekeyboard.Detailsaregiven intheDrumKitListofseparate DataList. When oneoftheDrumKit Voices inthe[PERCUSSION&DRUMKIT]groupisselected,you canplay various drums Selecting percussion sounds ou canplay individual soundeffects,such asbirdchirps andoceansounds fromthekeyboard. The soundeffectsare ou canselecttheGM/XG/GM2 Voices directlyviathepaneloperation. he instrumentcanplay different Voices simultaneously(page79). erform steps1–4describedabove, selectthedesiredcategory, thenselect thedesiredvoice. bass Voice withyour lefthandandthepiano Voice withyour righthand. Y T Setting separateVoices fortheleftandrightsectionsofkeyboard Layering twodifferentVoices

c ou canplay different Voices withtheleftandrighthands.For example,you cansetupthekeyboardtoplay the his isusefulforcreatingrich andthick sounds. 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 heck which “StandardKit1”percussion soundsareassignedtoeach key, lookattheiconsprintedabove thekeys. To the DemoforselectedVoice. In theVoice33 step3),pressthe[8 Selectiondisplay(page Play thekeyboard. Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectdesiredsoundeffect. Press the[F]buttontoselect“SoundEffect.” Press the[2 Press the[E]/[F]buttontoselect“GM&XG”/“GM2.” Press the[2 Press the[8 Use the[A]/[B]/[F]/[G](RIGHT1)buttonstoselectRIGHT1part. F or detailsonthe Voice allocationformat,seepage199. stoptheDemo,press[8 π π π ] buttontodisplay page2. ] buttontodisplay page2. ] (UP)buttontocallupthe Voice categories. † † † † ] (DEMO)buttonagain. † † † † ] (DEMO)buttontostart Quick Guide 35 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ou can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. “double-clicking” by to the original display ou can instantly jump back Y he preset Songs are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. he preset Songs are categorized and contained ou can also select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. ENTRY] using the [DATA by ou can also select the ﬁle Y T Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. button to Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song. n Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song category. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. Press the [SONG SELECT] button

Song data is called a “Song.” On the instrument, performance 5 4 3 2 1

he instrument includes not only the preset demo Songs, but also many preset Songs. This section covers basic infor- section covers This preset Songs. demo Songs, but also many he instrument includes not only the preset Playing Back Songs Before Practicing Songs Before Playing Back T the preset Songs or Songs in a CD-ROM. back mation on playing

n Practicing with the Songs the with Practicing Quick Guide 36 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Y Playing Songsinsequence F Playing SongssavedtoaUSBstoragedevice(page43) Playing SongssavedtoUSER(page43) or informationonusingUSBstorage devices,seepage22. ou canplay allSongsinafolder continuously. n 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 n 4 3 2 1 Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectdesiredSong. Press the TAB [ Press the[SONGSELECT]buttontocallupSongselectiondisplay. To Press theSONG[STOP] buttontostopcontinuous playback. All Songsinthefolderplay back continuously, inorder. Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontostartplayback. Press the[H](REPEAT MODE)buttontoselect“ALL.” [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperation display. Select aSonginthedesiredfolder. Use the[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaSong. T y Press the TAB [ Press the[SONGSELECT]buttontocallupSongselectiondisplay. Connect theUSBstorage devicetothe[USB TO DEVICE]terminal. ou insertedinStep1. he indication“USB1”/“USB2”willbedisplayed dependingonthenumberofconnecteddevices. turnofftheSongsequenceplayback, pressthe[H]buttontoselect“OFF”indisplay instep2. [USER] Y Select thefiletowhichdataissaved. [USB] Y Select thefiletowhichdataissaved. ou canalsoselectthespecifiedfiletowhich thedataissaved by pressingthe[USER]button. ou canalsoselectthespecifiedfiletowhich thedataissaved by pressingthe[USB]button. → → [A]SONG [A]SONG → √ √ [B]SONGSETTING ][ ][ ® ® ] buttonstoselecttheUSBtab(“USB1”/“USB2”),correspondingstorage device ] buttontoselecttheUSERtab. → → [A]–[J] [A]–[J] Quick Guide 37 ]. 3 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s † † † † π π π π ]–[8 † † † † π π π π ] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab. VOL/VOICE ] buttons to select the 4

® 2, ][ √ raise the level of the desired channel(s), press the appropriate buttons [1 of the desired channel(s), the level raise hich channel you wish to boost. you channel hich Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.” To Press the TAB [ TAB Press the at the top of the dis- “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8)” is shown Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until play. Select a Song. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing Back Songs Before Practicing (page (page Before Practicing Songs 35 step Back is the same as “Playing for selecting a Song method The Select a Song. 1–5).” CONSOLE display. button to call up the MIXING Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8) display, press the [MIXING CON- press the [MIXING in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8) display, is not shown If the desired channel (SONG CH9–16) display. SOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE Look at the channel indicators, which light as the Song plays back. Watching these as you listen can show you you listen can show these as you Watching back. plays light as the Song indicators, which Look at the channel w Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.” below of the instruments indicated Look at the illustrations 5 6 3 4 1 2 Boost the volume of the part to be practiced volume of the part Boost the for channel Specify the MIDI channels. for up to sixteen data can contain separate a single Song On the instrument, for the channel. volume the playback and increase practicing • If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise: volume If you don’t know which channel’s • Quick Guide 38 preferences. Y Changing theNotationDisplay starting topractice. Y Displaying MusicNotation(Score) n ou canchange thenotationdisplay asdesiredtosuityour personal ou canviewthemusicnotationofselectedSong. We suggest that you readthroughthemusicnotationbefore CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 2 1 •T •T •T 2 1 4 3 page 143. notes. mercially available sheetmusicofthesamesong—especiallywhen displaying notationofcomplicatedpassagesormany short ● ● ● ● he notationfunctionscannotbeusedtocreateSongdataby inputtingnotes.For informationoncreatingSongdata,see he displayed notationisgenerated by the instrumentbasedontheSongdata. As aresult,itmay notbeexactlythesameasc he instrumentcandisplay themusicnotationofcommercially-available musicdataoryour recordedSongs. n Press the[SCORE]buttontodisplaymusicnotation. Select aSong(page35). n • Changing thefollowingsettingsasdesired. tion. Press the[SCORE]buttontodisplaymusicnota- Press theSONG[STOP]buttontostopplayback. T Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontostartplayback. •T he “ball”bouncesalongthroughthescore,indicatingcurrentposition. the left-handpart/right-handpart. music notation. 4 3 2 1 Press the[1 Press the[7 Changing thesizeofmusicnotation Use the[1 played (part,lyrics,chords, etc.). Y Increase thenumberofmeasures inthedisplay Customizing thenotationdisplay notation Displaying onlyright-handpart/left-handpart Display thenotenameatleftof Press the[6 ou canincreasethenumber of measuresthatwillbedisplayed by decreasingtheother itemstobedis- urn onthenotecolors Press the[8 Press the[6 Press the[8 Press the[5 Press the TAB [ Look throughtheentirescorebeforeplayingbackSong C: red,D:yellow, E:green, F:orange, G: blue, A: purple,andB:gray T About thenotecolors hese colorsareﬁxedforeach noteandcannotbechanged. π† π† π† π† π π † π π π π π π π π π π ]–[4 ]/[2 ] buttontochange thesizeof ] buttontoturntheCOLORon. † † † † ® † † † † ] (OK)buttontoapplythesetting. ] (NOTE NAME) buttontoselect“Fixed Do.” ] buttontoselectsubsequentpages. π† ] (SETUP)buttontocallupthedetailedsettingdisplay. ] (NOTE) button todisplay thenotename. π† ] buttonstoturnofftheitems you want nottobedisplayed. ] buttontodisabledisplay of om- Quick Guide 39 [B]

→ CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s 2 3 4 ] buttons to set the view type. ] buttons † † † † π π π π he language is specified in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display (page 63). display of the OWNER he language is specified in LANGUAGE he MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically— for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned in the Song data he MIDI channels SONG SETTING. Assigns the specified to each of the left- and right-hand parts. (1–16) MIDI channel range. of the left-hand key disables display This assignment: No channel A, B). G, E, F, Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, differ depending on the selected language. Note names are indicated in solfeggio and T Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the are relative and as such to the scale intervals, Note names are indicated in solfeggio according example, in the key of G major the root note of “So” would root note is indicated as Do. For The key. the indication differs depending on the selected language. Do,” As with “Fixed be indicated as “Do.” T is specified in the [FUNCTION] same channelsetting the parts to the the channel which as his lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu menu This a song, at the stopped position. key signature changes in the middle of enter his lets you the note resolution in the notation, letting you control over shift or correct the timing you his gives 1–16 OFF (LEFT CH only) T key signature settings for displaying the selected Song contains no is useful when notation. T notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest of all displayed used in the song. note value at the left of the note in the notation from among the fol- Selects the type of the note name indicated the note in “Display parameter the NOTE when settings here are available The three types. lowing ON. name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to A, B, C FIXED DO Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This set- This part. used for the left-hand/right-hand in the Song data is channel MIDI which Determines a different Song is selected. when AUTO ting returns to AUTO MOVABLE DO MOVABLE ] (SETUP) button to call up the detailed setting display. the detailed setting button to call up ] (SETUP) ]–[6 ] (OK) button to apply the setting. † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π π π π π he notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 162). he notation view settings can be saved Save the notation view settings T urn the [GUIDE] button on. T Select a Song (page 35). Press the [8 n Press the [8 Press the [1 Press the NOTE NAME KEY SIGNATURE QUANTIZE LEFT CH/RIGHT CH 2 1 3 1 2 he key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold long you them, and how play should you when should play, he key guide lamps indicate the notes you Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps One-handed Practice with the Guide T the notes cor- to play for you pace—since the accompaniment waits own at your can also practice You them down. the part using the guide lamps. Here, mute the right- or left-hand part and try practicing rectly. Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired. view type of the parameters detailed Set the Quick Guide 40 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual page 141. Lamps” above. There areadditionalfunctionsintheGuidefeature,asdescribedbelow. To selectaguidefunction,see T Other guidefunctions n 2 n 1 T Adjusting thevolumebalancebetweenSongandkeyboard his letsyou adjust thevolume balancebetweenSongplayback andthesoundyou play onthekeyboard. he initialsetting“Follow withtheGuide 142)”was Lights(page usedintheinstructions“One-handedPractice •V • For Karaoke • For keyboardperformance 5 4 3 To [DIRECT ACCESS] Call uptheMaindisplay. 6 button. ing you topractice singingwiththecorrectpitch. T T Karao-Key T Any Key his automaticallycontrolsthetimingofaccompaniment to match themelody (pitch) ofyour singing—allow- his functionletsyou controltheSongplayback timingwithjustonefinger, while you singalong(page54). his letsyou practice thetimingofplaying thekeys. ocal CueTIME

adjust theSongvolume, pressthe[1 Press theSONG[STOP]buttontostopplayback. n Practice themutedpartusingguidelamps. Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontostartplayback. n T Press the[TRACK1(R)]buttontomuteright-handpart. T See page79. About keyboardparts(Right1,Right2,Left) When theBalancedisplay isnotindicated,pressthe[EXIT]button. T he Balancedisplay isindicatedatthebottomofMaindisplay. he indicatorofthe[TRACK 1(R)]buttongoesout. You cannow play thatpartby yourself. urn the[GUIDE]buttonoff. T (TapQuickly changingtempoduringaperformance function) Refer topage31. Adjusting thetempo In theGUIDELAMP TIMING, selectNEXT(page142). Have theguidelampﬂashalead-intomusic he tempocanalsobechanged duringSong playback by tappingthe[TAP TEMPO] buttontwiceatthedesiredtempo. → [EXIT] π† ] button. To adjustthekeyboard(RIGHT1)volume, pressthe[6 π† ] Quick Guide 41 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s

Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [STOP] button returns to Point A. button returns to Point or is stopped, pressing the [STOP] back the Song is playing Regardless of whether Instantly returning to Point A Follow the same steps as in “Practice the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Part (TRACK 1) Right-hand in “Practice the same steps as Follow the 39. on page Guide Lamps” urn the [GUIDE] button off. oint A to Point B is played back repeatedly. back B is played A to Point oint he Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [STOP] button. press the SONG [STOP] you repeatedly until back he Song will be played he indicator of the [TRACK 2 (L)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself. yourself. part by that play can now You 2 (L)] button goes out. [TRACK he indicator of the Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. button to turn off Repeat playback. Press the [REPEAT] Specify the repeat range. button to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] point (A) of the range button at the starting Press the [REPEAT] from the range into the phrase), After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you again at the ending point (B). P n Select a Song (page 35). Select a Song (page button to start playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. button to turn off Repeat playback. Press the [REPEAT] Select a Song (page 35). Select a Song (page to turn on Repeat playback. button Press the [REPEAT] button to start playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] T T Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback and practice the muted part button to start playback [PLAY/PAUSE] Press the SONG lamps. using the guide [STOP] button to stop playback. Press the SONG Press the [TRACK 2] button to mute the left-hand part. 2] button to mute the left-hand Press the [TRACK T 4 5 3 1 2 4 5 1 2 3 6 4 5 3 1,2 he Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song. This This of measures in a Song. range a Song or a specific back to repeatedly play he Song Repeat functions can be used Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeat- Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing edly (A-B Repeat) Playing Back a Song Repeatedly Playing Back a Song T phrases. of difficult-to-play is useful for repeated practicing Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function Practicing with the Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Using the Guide Lamps the Guide 2) Using (TRACK Part the Left-hand Practicing Quick Guide 42 y compare your own performancetotheoriginalsongyou arepracticing. You canalsouseittopractice duetpiecesby Record your performanceby usingtheQuick Recordingfeature. This isaneffective practice tool,allowing you toeasily Recording Your Performance Other MethodsforSpecifyingtheA–BRepeatRange ourself, ifyou have your teacher orpartnerrecordhisherpartbeforehand. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Specifying onlyPoint A resultsinrepeatplayback betweenPoint A andtheendofSong. ● ● 6 5 4 3 2 1 SpecifyingtherepeatrangebetweenPointAandendofSong 4 3 2 1 SpecifyingtherepeatrangewhileSongsarestopped Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontoplaybacktherecordedperformance. Press theSONG[STOP]buttontostoprecording. Start recording. Press the[REC]button. Select aVoice (page32). TheselectedVoice willberecorded. Press the[REC]and[STOP]buttonssimultaneously. button. A messagepromptingyou tosave therecorded performanceappears. To closethemessage,press[EXIT] Recording beginsautomaticallyassoonyou play anoteonthekeyboard. A blankSongforrecordingisautomaticallyset. Press the[REPEAT] buttonagaintospecifyPointB. Press the[FF]buttontoadvancePointBlocation. Press the[REPEAT] buttontospecifyPointA. Press the[FF]buttontoadvancePointAlocation. Quick Guide 43 or d CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] (CANCEL) button. ] (CANCEL) † ] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to USB, etc.) to which tab (USER, to select the appropriate ] buttons ] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance on. Assistant) ] button to turn the [P.A.T.] ® ][ † † † † [B] SONG SETTING √ ] (SAVE) button to call up the file naming display. naming button to call up the file ] (SAVE) the file. ] (OK) button to save π π π π → † † π π † † π π cancel the Save operation, press the [8 operation, cancel the Save CAUTION save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory, or select USB to save the data to a or select USB to save the data to a memory, USER to save the data to internal save the data. Select USB storage device. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] Press the [8 Select a Song (page 35). use the Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. In these example instructions, we recommend that you Press the [8 Press the TAB [ TAB Press the Press the [6 name (page 73). Enter the file Save the recorded performance.Save the display. Song selection to call up the [SONG SELECT] button Press the To

use the performance assistant technology, the Song must contain chord data. If the Song contains this data, the current chor contain chord the Song must use the performance assistant technology, Before using performance assistant technology To name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data data the Song contains chord whether easily check letting you during Song playback, in the Main display name will be displayed not. 2 3 1 5 2 3 4 7 1 The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save oper- you turn the power off without executing be lost if you change to another Song or The recorded song will ation. he recorded data has not yet been saved. To save the data, press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection dis- the data, press the [G] (YES) button save To been saved. he recorded data has not yet

Refer to page 36. play and save the data (see above). To cancel the operation, press the [H] (NO) button. the operation, cancel To the data (see above). and save play storage device Playing Songs saved to a USER/USB When the following message appears: “Song” changed. Save?/“Song” speichern?/“Song” modiﬁé. When the following message appears: “’Song” ? cambiado. ¿Guardar?/Salvare Sauv.?/“Song” T n

assistant Technology easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback. This feature makes it exceptionally Playing Backing Parts with the performancePlaying Backing Quick Guide 44 many others. Styles. TheStylesoftheinstrumentcoverawiderangedifferentmusicalgenresincludingpop,jazz,and even ifyou’replayingbyyourself.TheAutoAccompanimentsoundismadeupoftherhythmpatterns the “chords” withyourlefthand.Thisletsyouautomaticallyrecreatethesoundofafullbandororchestra— The AutoAccompanimentfeaturesletyouproduceautomaticaccompanimentplaybacksimplybyplaying paniment Feature(StylePlayback) Playing AccompanimentwiththeAutoAccom- CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual ●● ●● (method 1). Playing handtogether theleftandright 5 4 7 6 three differentways below. no matterwhat keysyou play. Iteven changes thesoundaccordingtoway you play. Try playing inthe T Play thekeyboard. Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontostartplayback. Press the[8 Press theSONG[STOP]buttontostopplayback. he instrumentautomaticallymatches your performanceonthekeyboardtoSongplayback andchords, r same timewithyour Play threenotesatthe ight hand. π π π π † † † † ] buttontoturnthe[P.A.T.] Assistant)off. (Performance (method 2). Playing handtogether theleftandright gers ofyour hand. right the otherwithdifferent fin- Play several notesoneafter alternately. Playing hand thelefthandandright r same timewithyour Play threenotesatthe ight hand. Quick Guide 45 Ending 1 C CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] buttons to switch the tempo dis- ] buttons to switch 1 π† ]/[6 π† G 4 4 ] CONFIG 2 ® ][ MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB HAD MARY 1 √ C AB [ T 1 → CGC 1 22 2 [J] UTILITY → 21 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 33 35 1 C 3 C ith the default settings, the Display Style Tempo function is on. Tempo Style ith the default settings, the Display Press the STYLE CONTROL “COUNTRY” button. Press the STYLE CONTROL “COUNTRY” empo is not displayed above the Style name. above empo is not displayed empo is displayed above the Style name. above empo is displayed OFF: T ON: T W • Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO) button, and use the [5 STYLE Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY • Call up the operation display. Call up the operation [FUNCTION] 1 play on/off. play aditional ou can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not. above the tempo is displayed ou can select whether Tr Country Pop Style: 2 Enabling tempo display above Style name Y 1 Accompaniment Feature Accompaniment Playing “MaryPlaying Auto with the Lamb” a Little Had Quick Guide 46 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 2 6 5 4 3 n n Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaStyle“CountryPop.” When Endingplayback isfinished,theStyleautomaticallystops. point inthescore(page45)indicatedby“Ending.” Automatically playanappropriateendingby pressing the[ENDING]button,at n T As soonasyouplayachordwithyourlefthand,theAutoAccompanimentstarts. simultaneously starttheaccompanimentassoonyouplaying. Press the[SYNCSTART] buttontosetAutoAccompanimentstandby—lettingyou Use theleft-handsection(lower part)ofthekeyboardtoplay thechords forsoundingthe Auto Accompaniment. Press the[ACMPON/OFF]buttontoturnonAutoAccompaniment. ry playing chords withyour lefthandandplay amelody withyour righthand. •Y T Chord Fingerings • • •W •T • • here areseven differentfingeringmethodsyou canusetospecifychords (page107). button. v T (TapQuickly changingtheStyletempoduringaperformance function) Refer totheStyleListinseparate DataListbooklet. About thevariousStyles istics, seepage107. See page110. T See page111. Specifying thesplitpoint(theborderbetweenright-andleft-hand range) 3 ou caninstantlyjumpback totheoriginaldisplay by “double-clicking” ononeofthe[A]–[J]buttons. oices andtempos,etc.)designedtobestmatch theselectedStyle. To returntothepreviousdisplay, pressthe[EXIT] he Styletypeanditsdefiningcharacteristics areindicatedabove thePresetStylename.For detailsonthecharacter- he tempocanalsobechanged duringplayback by tappingthe[TAP TEMPO] buttontwiceatthedesiredtempo. urns touchresponseon/offfortheStyleplayback(StyleTouch) hen the[7 π ] (REPERTOIRE) buttonispressedafterselectingaStyle,you cancallupthecustompanelsettings(for 56 45 Quick Guide 47 ng tton. ] π† CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s [B] 4 TAP [B] 4 → ] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6 keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, adjust the To ] button. π† ] CONFIG 1 √ AB[ T → [EXIT] → [J] UTILITY → he Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display. If the Balance display is not selected, press the [EXIT] bu is not display If the Balance at the bottom of the Main display. is indicated he Balance display or details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 109. F T adjust the Style volume, press the [2 press adjust the Style volume,

he particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the followi Tap the (loudness) of the sound when he particular drum sound and the velocity display. [FUNCTION] button. T Call up the Main display. Call up the [DIRECT ACCESS] To his lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard. on play you and the sound Style playback balance between the volume adjust his lets you or information on the settings, see page 191. or information on the settings, see Start Playing n Fade In F 1 n 2 Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard (page 40) Style and the keyboard between the the volume balance Adjusting T Start/Stop Intro Synchro Start Tap his is used for the beginning of the song. Each preset Style features three different intros. When the intro finished play- When the intro finished Style features three different intros. preset Each his is used for the beginning of the song. the keyboard. play as soon as you start playback his lets you hord patterns, for more dynamic, professional-sounding performances. There are several different auto accompani- several are There professional-sounding performances. dynamic, hord patterns, for more ap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP TEMPO] tap (press/release) the [TAP ap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply n button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. automatically at the tempo you starts button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback ● button is pressed. the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] as soon as back Styles start playing ● T below). section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback” ing, accompaniment shifts to the Main [START/STOP] and press the STYLE CONTROL before starting Style playback Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons button to start Style playback. ● T section of the keyboard the chord in a chord is stopped and play Style playback button when Press the [SYNC START] to start Style playback. ● T To ment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance, during your performance, and ending your per- performance, and ending your performance, during your situation: starting your for each ment pattern variations freely. and combine them out the variations Try formance. Pattern Variation in the rhythm/ intros and endings, as well as variations can automatically add specially created you play, While you c Quick Guide 48 Press the[SYNCSTOP] buttonbefore startingtheStyleplayback. the chord sectionofthekeyboard). This isagreatway toadddramatic breaksandaccentstoyour performance. When Synchro Stopison,you canstopandstarttheStyleanytime you want by simplyreleasingorplaying thekeys(in ● Others n (ritardando) by pressingthesameENDING/rit.buttonagainwhile theendingisplaying back. Press oneoftheENDING/rit.[I]–[III]buttonsduringStyleplayback. You canhave theendinggradually slow down the Stylestopsautomatically. T ● Styles stopassoontheSTYLECONTROL[START/STOP] buttonispressed. ● To Press the[BREAK]buttonduringStyleplayback. professional. T ● plays afill-inbeforereturningtothesamemainsection. Even when [AUTO FILLIN]buttonisturnedoff,pressingthesameofcurrentlyplaying sectionautomatically C,D). itleadssmoothlyintotheselectedmainsection(A,B, isfinished, When thefill-in ing uptheautoaccompaniment. MAIN VARIATION play, (A,B,C,D)buttonsasyou sectionplaysautomatically(AUTO FILL),spic- andtheselectedfill-in T formance soundeven moreprofessional. T ● Press oneoftheMAIN[A]–[D]buttonsduringStyleplayback. indefinitely. Each presetStylefeaturesfourdifferentpatterns. T ● During StylePlayback n urn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback orduringplayback. urn onthe[AUTO FILLIN]buttonbeforestartingStyleplayback Then, simplypressoneofthe his isusedfortheendingofSong.Each presetStylefeaturesthreedifferentendings. When theendingisfinished, his letsyou adddynamic breaksintherhythm oftheaccompaniment,tomakeyour performancesoundeven more he fill-insectionsletyou adddynamic variations andbreaksintherhythm oftheaccompaniment,tomakeyour per- his isusedforplaying themainpartofSong.Itplays anaccompanimentpatternofseveral measures,andrepeats CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Synchro Stop Ending Start/stop Break Fill In Main n F ● FinishPlaying or informationonthesettings,see page 191. Fade Out • • If you presstheENDING/rit.[I]buttoninmiddleofyour performance,afill-inautomaticallyplays beforetheENDING/rit. F Fixing thesection patterntoeitherIntroorMain (SectionSet) See page110. Enable SynchroStopbypressing/releasing keys(SynchroStopWindow) or example,you can setthisfunctiontoIntroconveniently have anIntroplay automaticallywhenever you selectaStyle(p F or detailsonsettingthefade-inandfade-outtime,seepage109. [I]. age 110). Quick Guide 49 ] CHORD FINGERING ® ][ √ CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s AB[ T → 3 2 ] button to select the chord type. † † † † π π π π ]/[8 ] button to select the root note. † † † † † † † † [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD π π π π π π π π → he notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered, no matter which fingering type is selected (page 108). no matter which correspond to Fingered, he notes that are displayed T he notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display. are shown to make the selected chord need to play he notes you Press the [7 T n Press the [6 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] 3 2 1 he section is currently selected. he section no data and cannot be played. he section contains he section is not selected. he section Red T Off T Green T • • About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, etc.) lamps (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, section button About the • If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it, you can have the instrument show you the notes to play the notes to play you instrument show the can have it, you to play how know but don’t the name of a chord If know function). (Chord Tutor Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords Notes to Play for Certain Learning the Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback to Play (Indicate) Learning How Quick Guide 50 n w (Voices oreffects,etc.)forthecurrentlyselectedStyle,withtouch ofasinglebutton.Ifyou’ve already decided One Touch Settingisapowerful andconvenient featurethatautomatically callsupthemostappropriatepanelsettings Setting) Appropriate PanelSettingsfortheSelectedStyle(OneTouch the instrument. F Checking HowtoPlayChordswiththeGuideLamps or Songscontainingchord data,you canhave theindividual notesofthechords indicatedwiththeGuidelampson hich Styleyou wishtouse,you canhave One Touch Settingautomaticallyselecttheappropriate Voice foryou. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 Y Parameter Lock ou can“lock” specificparameters (e.g.,effect,splitpoint,etc.)tomakethemselectableonlyviathepanelcontrols(page1 Press the[GUIDE]button. Press the[ACMPON/OFF]buttontoturnonAutoAccompaniment. play, andmakesurethattheGUIDEMODEissetto“FollowLights.” Press the[FUNCTION]buttonandpress[B]tocallupSongSettingdis- Select aSong(page35). As soonasyouplayachordwithyourlefthand, theselectedStylestarts. Press oneoftheONETOUCHSETTING[1]–[4]buttons. Select aStyle(page46step2). Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontostartplayback. immediately startplaying theStyle. A current Style—italsoautomaticallyturnson settings (Voices, effects,etc.)thatmatch the Not onlydoesthisinstantlycallupallthe ing thechords, matching theGuidelamps. T he Guidelampsinthechord sectionofthekeyboardflash accordingtothechords oftheSong. Try practic- CMP andSYNCSTART, sothatyou can 32). Quick Guide 51 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s 23 he One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 110). sections in one of two with the change Settings can be set to Touch he One Setting the timing for OTS changes Setting the timing for T CAUTION The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without The panel settings memorized to each OTS executing the Save operation. Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style the panel settings as a Style file (page 69). save and display Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, Voice, as (such Set up the panel controls and so on) as desired. button. Press the [MEMORY] SETTING [1]–[4] buttons. TOUCH Press one of the ONE to save prompting you the display A message appears in the panel settings. the panel settings with another file It is possible to save number from 1 to 4. (step 4), so register it in a favorite Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS Memorizing the panel Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link) Main sections Settings with the Touch changing One Automatically he convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when when Settings change Touch One have automatically function lets you Setting) Link Touch (One OTS he convenient ou select a different Main section (A–D).To use the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button. LINK] the [OTS Link function, press use the OTS (A–D).To different Main section ou select a ou can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. Touch One own ou can also create your 4 1 2 3 T y n ● Y Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting Touch for using One Helpful hints ● Quick Guide 52 n A newrecordcanbecreatedbyeditingthecurrentlyselectedone(page 114). tings toletyouplayinthatmusicstyle. from amongtheMusicFinder“Records,”andinstrumentautomaticallymakesallappropriatepanelset- appropriate, theconvenientMusicFinderfunctioncanhelpyouout.Simplyselectdesiredmusicgenre If youwanttoplayinacertaingenreofmusicbutdon’tknowwhichStyleandVoice settingswouldbe Calling UpIdealSetupsforEachSong—Music Finder CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual • • • • 3 2 1 T he data(records)oftheMusicFinder arenot thesameasSongdataandcannotbeplayed back. TEMPO BEAT STYLE MUSIC To Select thedesiredrecordbyusingfollowing foursearch categories. T Press theTAB [ Press the[MUSICFINDER]buttontocallupMUSICFINDERdisplay. n he ALL tabcontainsthepresetrecords. selectarecord,pressthe[2 ...... This isthetimesignature registered toeach...... This Record...... This isthepreset Styleassignedtotherecord...... This • •Y ...... Contains thesongtitleormusicgenrethatdescribes each record,lettingyou easily ...... Contains ...... instantly callupalltherecordsthatmatch your search criteria(page112). T Searching therecords ou canalsoselectthedesiredrecordby usingthe[DATA ENTRY] dial,thenpressthe [ENTER] buttontoexecute. he MusicFinder isalsoequippedwithaconvenient search functionthat letsyou enterasongtitleorkeyword—and 1 T n n find thedesiredmusicstyle. his istheassigned temposettingfortherecord. √ ] buttontoselecttheALLtab. Styles alphabetically. Simultaneouslypressthe[ When sortingrecordsby Stylename, usethe[4 alphabetically. Simultaneouslypressthe[ Skipping upordownthroughthe Stylealphabetically When sortingrecordsby songtitle,usethe[1 Skipping upordownthroughthesongalphabetically π π π π 3 † † † † ]/[3 π π π π † † † † ] buttons. π† π† π† ] buttonstomove thecursortofirstrecord. π† ] buttontoskipupordown throughthesongs ]/[5 ] buttonstomove thecursortofirst record. π† ] buttontoskipupordown throughthe 2 Quick Guide 53 32). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] buttons to select the desired panel settings. ] buttons to select the desired † † † † π π π π ]–[3 ] (REPERTOIRE) button. † † † † π π π π π π π π he Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” tab. The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles The tab. for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” he Repertoire function is valid T the desired Style in “USER” tab. use the Repertoire function, save To device. to a USB storage saved CAUTION he panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the the Style under selection is searched he panel settings that match mpo Lock When the result of searching the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the searched result is searched the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the When the result of searching lost. Press the [2 Press the [7 T of the Music Finder. 2” display on the “SEARCH shown results is list of the search The Music Finder. Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the Select the desired Style for which selection display. “PRESET”/“USER” tab on Style n Play the keyboard. Play the record. genre of the selected to match the music changed been automatically have the panel settings Notice that ou can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 1 split point, etc.) to make them selectable (e.g., effect, specific parameters ou can “lock” empo Lock function, press the [I] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display. LOCK) button in the Music Finder function, press the [I] (TEMPO empo Lock empo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record. To turn on the turn on To record. selecting another when during Style playback Tempo the changing avoid function lets you empo Lock Parameter Lock Y T T Te 3 • 2 1 • 4 MUSIC ...... song title. is sorted by record The STYLE...... Style name. record is sorted by The BEAT ...... beat. record is sorted by The TEMPO ...... tempo. record is sorted by The Sorting the records BY) button to sort the records. Press the [F] (SORT • • • • Changing the order of the records the order of the records (ascending or descending). ORDER) button to change Press the [G] (SORT he convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for number, settings (voice calls up the most appropriate panel Repertoire function automatically he convenient n ertoire) T the currently selected Style. Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Rep- to match the Style the panel settings Calling up Quick Guide 54 Connecting aMicrophone lowing alongwiththenotationandlyrics. ics showninthedisplay. Lyrics canalsobedisplayedwiththemusicscore,lettingyouplayandsingwhilefol- The lyricscanbedisplayedwhentheSongcontainslyricdata.Singwithmicrophoneasyoureadlyr- mance. Connect amicrophonetotheinstrumentandsingalongwithSongplayback(Karaoke)oryourownperfor- Y Singing AlongwithSongPlayback(Karaoke)or CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual our OwnPerformance 5 4 3 2 1 n Disconnecting themicrophone that thislampdoesnotlight. w adjust theINPUT VOLUME sothatthislampislight. The OVER lamplights lamp lightstoindicate thatanaudiosignalisbeingreceived. Makesure to Adjust thecontrolswhile checking theSIGNAL andOVER lamps. The SIGNAL VOLUME] knobwhilesingingintothemicrophone. (For microphoneshavingapowersource, turnonthepowerfirst.)Adjust[INPUT Set the[MIC.LINE]switchto“MIC.” n Connect themicrophoneto[MIC./LINEIN]jack. position. Set the[INPUTVOLUME]knobonbottompanelofinstrumenttominimum Make sureyouhaveaconventionaldynamicmicrophone. 2 1 hen theinputlevel istoohigh.Makesuretoadjust theINPUT VOLUME so Disconnect themicrophone fromthe[MIC./LINEIN]jack. Set the[INPUTVOLUME]knob onthebottompanelofinstrumenttominimum position. Set the[INPUT VOLUME] knobtotheminimumposition beforeturningoffthepower. connected. highly sensitive, itmay pick up andproducenoisewhen nothingis nected tothe[MIC/LINEIN]jack. Sincethe[MIC/LINEIN]jack is Always settheINPUT VOLUME tominimumwhen nothingiscon- 2, 5 I MAX MIN VOLUME IN PUT LINE IN LINE 3 MIC. MI 4 C. LI NE PHONES Quick Guide 55 . [B]

→ ] button CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] (BACKGROUND) button in the Lyrics dis- button in the Lyrics ] (BACKGROUND) π† ]/[8 π† ] (LYRICS) button to display the lyrics. to display button ] (LYRICS) † ] (TEXT) button to display the text. ] (TEXT) button to display † ] buttons to select other pages. ® ][ display described above. The background setting is common for both the Lyr- background The described above. display display. Text and ics display √ ] (TEXT FILE) buttons to call up the Text selection display. Text ] (TEXT FILE) buttons to call up the ] buttons to select the desired TAB. ] buttons to select the desired π† ® ][ ]/[6 √ π† hen the background color is specified in the song data, the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed. color is specified in the song data, the BACKGROUND hen the background he text file, which is copied in the USER tab can be showed. he text file, which entirety because of limitations in the screen space, execute the line feed on your computer. entirety because of limitations in the screen space, execute the line feed on your Line feed (or “carriage return”) is not automatically performed in the instrument. If a sentence is not displayed in its is not displayed Line feed (or “carriage return”) is not automatically performed in the instrument. If a sentence An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn pages (page 191). Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays. as the the lyrics changes color of The on the display. along with the lyrics following Sing while When the Text display appears, press the [1 display Text When the •W •T • Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. [PLAY/PAUSE] Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. Press the SONG Select a Song (page 35). Select a to display the lyrics. button Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] he lyrics background picture can be saved to the Song (page 162). to picture can be saved he lyrics background ou can change the background picture of the Lyrics display. Press the [7 display. picture of the Lyrics the background ou can change ou can change the lyrics as desired (page 166). ou can change ou may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” or “Japanese” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] Song Setting display in the setting to “International” or “Japanese” Language the Lyrics need to change ou may When the lyrics are unreadable Y Background Picture Changing the Lyrics Y Changing the lyrics Y play to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture files and select the desired one. Press the [EXIT for the available picture selection display to call up the Lyrics play to return to the previous display. T SONG SETTING), if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 162) setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page This are garbled or unreadable. SONG SETTING), if the lyrics shown Press the TAB [ TAB Press the one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a text file. Double-click [ TAB If the text is long, use the Connect the USB storage device containing the text file to [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. DEVICE] TO text file to [USB device containing the Connect the USB storage the text. button to display Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] press the [1 When the lyrics are displayed, Press the [5 • • 3 4 1 2 • CK GROUND...... Allows changing of the background picture of the text display, as in the Lyrics as in the Lyrics CK GROUND...... Allows picture of the text display, background of the changing he following additional settings are available in the TEXT display: in the additional settings are available he following his feature lets you show text files (created on a computer) in the display of the instrument, enabling various of the instrument, enabling various (created on a computer) in the display text files show his feature lets you YRICS display. the screen to the Lyrics ...... Switches n T L (the text data itself is not erased). CLEAR...... Clears the text from the display 28FIXED 16-PROPORTIONAL .....Determines or proportional) and font size. the text type (fixed selection display. Text TEXT FILE...... Opens the BA 4 5 n 1 2 3 Displaying Text T names, and text notes. of lyrics, chord as the showing useful possibilities, such ry singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data a Song containing back playing while ry singing n Singing with the Lyrics Display the Lyrics with Singing T Quick Guide 56 • •T Y Applying EffectstoYour Voice •T Y T Convenient FunctionsforKaraoke ou canalsoapplyvarious effectstoyour voice. ou canusethistoadjustthekeyofSongifitistoohighorlow. Practicing SingingwithProperPitch(Vocal CueTIME) Adding HarmonyVocals toYour Voice Applying EffectstoYour Voice T Adjusting thetempo eetn h rnpsto ...... Pressthe TRANSPOSE [+][–]buttonssimultaneously...... Resetting thetransposition CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual ranspose ranspose r r 2 1 T Displaying thelyrics/textonanexternalTV, video,orcomputermonitor npsn h ogkydw...... Pressthe TRANSPOSE [–]button. ansposing theSongkeydown...... npsn h ogkyu...... Pressthe TRANSPOSE [+]button. ansposing theSongkeyup...... he lyrics/textindicatedonthedisplay canalsobeoutputviatheVIDEOOUT/RGBOUTterminal. 2 1 P Set theexternaltelevision,video,orcomputermonitorsignal(NTSC, puter monitor. connector oftheinstrumenttovideoinputon TV/com- Use anappropriatevideocabletoconnectthe[VIDEOOUT]/[RGBOUT] 2 1 AL, orRGB)usedby your video equipment,ifnecessary. puter monitorsignal. Press the[1 [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperation display. n Press the[4 Call uptheoperationdisplay. [FUNCTION] Y Selecting aneffect type ou canselectthe effecttypeintheMixingConsole (page92). π† → → π π π π ] buttontoselecttheexternaltelevision,video,orcom- [J]UTILITY [G]MICSETTING/VOCAL HARMONY † † † † ]/[5 π π π π → † † † † T ] buttonstoturntheeffect on. AB [ √ ][ ® ] SCREENOUT ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ page 142 page 57 See below. See below. page 31 RGB OUT computer monitor TV monitor Quick Guide 57 4 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s 3 ] buttons to turn the harmony vocals (Vocal Harmony) on. Harmony) the harmony vocals (Vocal ] buttons to turn † † † † π π π π ]/[7 † † † † [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL π π π π → he harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data. according to the chord voice is applied to your he harmony or details on the Vocal Harmony types, refer to the separate Data List. types, refer to the separate Harmony Vocal or details on the T F [FUNCTION] If the Song contains this data, the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song during Song in the Main display be displayed name will this data, the current chord If the Song contains data or not. the Song contains chord whether check easily letting you playback, Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button and sing into the microphone. button and Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type. to select a Vocal Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons Press the [H] button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display. the Vocal Press the [H] button to call up Press the [6 Select a Song which contains chord data (page 35). chord data Song which contains Select a display. Call up the operation 7 6 5 4 3 1 2 ou can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice. to your vocals harmony various automatically apply ou can also Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice to Your Vocals Harmony Adding Y Quick Guide 58 keyboard partupandthesongdatadown toyour desiredsingingkey. keys, settheMaster Transpose to“0,” theKeyboard Transpose to“2,” andtheSong Transpose to“-3.” This bringsthe y Y Changing theKey(Transpose) Own Performance Convenient FunctionsforSingingAlongwithYour ou canmatch boththeSongandyour keyboardperformancetoacertainkey. For example,theSongdataisinF, but ou feelmostcomfortablesinginginD, andyou areaccustomedtoplaying thekeyboardpartinC. To match upthe Controlling PlaybackTimingbyYour Voice (Karao-Key) Making AnnouncementsBetweenSongs andTextDisplaying theMusicScoreonInstrumentandLyrics onexternalmonitor Changing theKey(Transpose) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 2 n 1 Y Adjusting themicrophoneandSongvolume(page40) ou canadjustthevolume balancebetweentheSongplayback andthemicrophone. To To [DIRECT ACCESS] Call uptheMaindisplay. 4 3 2 1 adjusttheSongvolume, pressthe[1 adjustthemicrophonevolume, pressthe[4 Press the[EXIT]buttontocloseTRANSPOSE display. Press theTRANSPOSE[–]/[+]buttontotranspose. Press the[4 Call uptheoperationdisplay. [FUNCTION] Tr ● Tr ● section ofthekeyboard). Tr ● T To Y If theBalancedisplay isnotindicated,pressthe[EXIT]button. T he Balancedisplay isindicatedatthebottomofMaindisplay. ou cansetthevalue insemitonesteps. he following typesareavailable. Select the onemostsuitedtoyour purpose. MASTER SONG KEYBOARD anspose theoverall pitch oftheinstrument. ansposes thepitch ofSongplayback. anspose pitch ofthekeyboardplayed Voices andStyleplayback (controlledby what you play inthechord resetthetranspose value, pressthe[+][–]buttonssimultaneously. → → π π π π [EXIT] [D]CONTROLLER † † † † ]/[5 π π π π † † † † ] buttontoselectthedesiredtransposetype. π† → ] button. T π† AB [ ® ] button. ] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ page 142 page 59 page 59 See below. Quick Guide 59 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] SCREEN OUT ® 2 ][ √ AB [ T → ] (TALK) button to turn the function on. ] (TALK) ] button to select LYRICS. ] button to select π π π π π π π π ]/[3 ]/[4 [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL [J] UTILITY π π π π π π π π → → alk settings can be customized as well, allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak to your audi- speak to your as you voice your desired effects to to add any you alk settings can be customized as well, allowing T ence (page 174). [FUNCTION] [FUNCTION] Press the [2 n Call up the operation display. Press the [3 Call up the operation display. Call up the operation 2 1 2 1 his function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances. When singing a song, several When singing a song, several singing performances. your for making announcements between his function is ideal his convenient sing-along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument (for your (for your of the instrument the display on score shown the music have lets you sing-along function his convenient T sound dis- effects may these audience, however, When speaking to your Setup. effects are usually assigned to the MIC is turned on, effects are automatically turned off. function the TALK Whenever turbing or unnatural. Making Announcements Between Songs Between Making Announcements T along. audience can sing so your 56) external monitor (page on an the lyrics are shown only while purposes), playing Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics and the Lyrics on the Instrument Score the Music Displaying monitor on external and Text Quick Guide 60 flash memory. mum amountofrecordingtimeis80minutes,thoughthismay differdependingonthecapacityofparticularUSB Now, tryrecordingaperformanceofyour singingalongwithSongplayback withaconnectedmicrophone. The maxi- Recording Your asAudio Performance • • The recordeddatausingthisfunctionissavedas: n • • • The followingsoundscanberecorded. ence betweenaudioandMIDIrecording,see page 196.For specificinstructionsonMIDIrecording,referto page 200. Recording methodsontheinstrumentincludeMIDIrecordingaswellaudiorecording.For detailsaboutthediffer- many otherstoenjoy aswell. mances andrecordingswithyour friendsviae-mail,recordyour own CDs,oruploadtherecordingstowebsitesfor have theparticularinstrumentinordertohearperformance. This makesitpossibletoeasilyshareyour perfor- tional CDquality(44.1kHz/16bit).Sinceitispossibletoplay back thefileoncomputer, alistenerdoesn’t needto together orrecordyourself singingalongwithSongplayback. The performancedataissaved asa WAV fileofconven- guitar, microphoneorotherdevicetotheinstrument,you canrecordanensembleperformanceofguitarandkeyboard Here you’ll learnhow torecordyour performanceasaudiodatatoaUSBflash memory. For example,by connectinga Audio Recorder) Recording Your asAudio(USB Performance n CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 44.1 kHzsamplerate/16 bitresolution Stereo WAVdata Input fromanotheraudiodevice,such asaCDplayer, MP3player orthelike(via[MIC./LINEIN]jack). Input fromamicrophone,guitarorotherinstrument(viathe[MIC./LINEIN]jack). K Internal tonegenerator oftheinstrument. eyboard parts(Right1,Right2,Left),Songparts,Style •W 2 1 • •W Moreover, theeffectofiAFC(page82)isnotreflectedinrecording. Songs protectedby copyright, such aspresetsongs,andthemetronomesoundcannotberecorded. In ordertorecordyour own originalCD, you’ll needa CD-Rdrive (orcompatibledevice).Refertothemanualthatcamewithy specific computerfordetails. Connect the USB flash memory to the[USBTODEVICE]terminal. Connect theUSBflashmemory microphone, seepage54.) a microphone.(Forinformationonsettingthe Voice, seepage28;for connectinga Set thedesiredVoice, andconnect etc.whichyouwanttouseforyourperformance, on tostep6(page 46). Here, you’ll also seeby examplehow tosingalongwithaccompaniment/Style playback. To setthe Style,go n hen you attach arecordedfileinane-mailmessage,makesurethesizeissmallenoughtobesent. hen recordingwiththeUSB Audio Recorderfunction,makesuretouseanappropriateUSBflashmemorydevice. • •T Before usingaUSBflashmemory, besuretoread“HandlingtheUSBStorage Device(USBFlashMemory/Floppy Disk, etc)”onpage22. memory isnotcompatible,it likelytobeablerecord/playback normally. o recordyour performanceby USB Audio Recorder, usethecompatible USBflashmemory. When theUSBflash our Quick Guide 61

ious display. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s 6, 7 8 4 5 3 he recording operation continues, even if you close the Recording display by pushing the [EXIT] button. To stop the To pushing the [EXIT] button. by close the Recording display if you continues, even he recording operation T button on the Recording display. recording, press the [J] (STOP) CAUTION void frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB flash memory, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so void frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB flash memory, he file name is automatically named (and is always given a new, unique name), and a message indicating a new, given he file name is automatically named (and is always A may corrupt the USB flash memory data or the recording data. Stop recording by pressing the [J] (STOP) button. T the file name is displayed. n When recording begins, the “RECORDING” indication on the display changes to red, and the elapsed changes When recording begins, the “RECORDING” indication on the display recording time is displayed. Start recording by pressing the [J] (REC) button, then start your performance.Start recording by pressing the [J] (REC) button, then start your If necessary, press the [E] (PROPERTY) button to call up the Property display, then button to call up the Property display, press the [E] (PROPERTY) If necessary, flash memory. check the information of the USB Press the [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER) button to call up the recording display Press the [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER) (USB AUDIO RECORDER display). Press the [USB] button. Press the he USB storage device of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when multiple USB storage devices are connected. If a multiple USB storage device of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when he USB storage floppy disk drive is assigned to “USB1,” “USB1” will be skipped. To check the number of the USB storage device (USB1 and USB2, the number of the USB storage check To “USB1” will be skipped. is assigned to “USB1,” disk drive floppy [EXIT] button to return to the prev the tab. Press the of step 4, and change etc.), press the [A]/[B]/[F] button on the display T 7 6 5 4 3 DRIVE NAME ...... device (USB 1, USB 2, etc.) Number of the USB storage ALL SIZE...... device Size of USB storage AREA...... FREE device space on the USB storage recording Available TIME...... POSSIBLE time for recording Available he following information is indicated on the PROPERTY display. information is indicated on the PROPERTY he following n T • • • • display. Press the [F] (OK)/[EXIT] button to close the PROPERTY Quick Guide 62 Play back therecordedperformance. Playing BacktheRecordedPerformance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 3 2 1 4 saved totheconnectedUSBflashmemory. press the[8 Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonscorrespondingtofileyouwantlistento,then Press the[7 Call uptheUSBAUDIORECORDERdisplay. of “RecordingYour asAudio”above. Performance Press the[EXIT]buttontoreturnUSBAUDIORECORDERdisplayshowninstep4 [USB] ing. closes automaticallywhen auditioningisstopped.Pressthe[G](CANCEL) or[EXIT]buttontostopaudition- T play”68. However, onpage theoperation thatcopies/moves file/foldertotheUsertabcannotbedonehere. name ofthedisplayed fileortodeleteafile, seethesection “File/Folder Operations intheFile SelectionDis- T n dataortheauditioningdata. may corrupttheUSBflashmemory A he songisplayed back fromthebeginning,anddisplay indicatestheauditioningprocess. This display 60). Forhe filerecordedisselectedinstep1-7(page informationabouttheoperation methodtochange the void frequentlyconnecting/disconnectingtheUSBflashmemory, orturningthepoweron/offtoooften.Doingso CAUTION → of each partwith Volume Balance display (page40)andtheMixingConsole88),etc.,tryrecordingagain. fore, theplayback soundmightbedistortedifyou recordattoohighavolume. Inthiscase,lower andadjustthevolume A udio recordingisprocessedinternallysothatplayback volume willbeappropriatewhen played onacomputer. There- [E](USB AUDIO RECORDER). π π π π † † † † † † † † ] (AUDITION)button. ]/[8 π π π π † † † † ] (AUDITION) button to display the audio files (WAV] (AUDITION)buttontodisplaytheaudiofiles data) Basic Operation

Selecting Message Language You can select the desired language of the display messages.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER The language selected here is also used for various “Mes- 2 Use [4π†]/[5π†] (LANGUAGE) buttons to select the language. sages” shown during operations. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Basic Operation

The Messages Shown in the Display A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate button.

In this example, press the [F] (YES) button to start formatting the MEDIA (USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 63 Instant Selection of the Displays—Direct Access

Instant Selection of the Displays— Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display—with just a single additional button press.

1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button.

2 Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function.

Example of calling up the Guide function display Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [GUIDE] button. Basic Operation

Returning to the Main display You can conveniently return to the Main display from any other display by simply pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

64 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 65 appears at the right of appears at the right of √ √ appears at the left of the Voice Voice appears at the left of the

the Voice the Voice name. select the RIGHT 2 When you part, the Voice name. select the LEFT part, When you ® Returning to the Main display Returning to the Main to way a convenient Here’s from return to the Main display Simply press other display: any button, ACCESS] the [DIRECT then the [EXIT] button. select the RIGHT 1 When you part, name. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] buttons. π† 4 5 6 ]–[8 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Selection and File (Main Display Displays Basic π† 9 78 ! ) 2 3 1 above). Pressing the [I] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 35). Pressing the [I] button calls up the Song Selection display above). 3 oice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 79). oice name currently selected for the RIGHT oice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 79). oice name currently selected for the RIGHT oice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 79). oice name currently selected for the LEFT V olume Balance oice name RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge): V RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge): LEFT (indicated at the right edge): V ranspose empo T in semitone units (page 56). the amount of transposition Displays T the current tempo of the Song or Style. Displays BAR (current position of the Song or Style) Recording status of USB Audio recorder While recording, a “REC” indication appears. Registration Sequence (page 134). Sequence is active the Registration Appears when V balance among the parts. the volume Displays using the [1 balance among the parts by Adjust the volume Registration Memory Bank name Memory Bank name. the currently selected Registration Displays Style name and related information currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [D] the Displays (page 45). button calls up the Style Selection display Current chord name section of the specified in the chord ON/OFF] button is set to On, the chord If the [ACMP keyboard will be displayed. Song name and related information and tempo. the currently selected Song name, time signature Displays V Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style. Displays If the Song contains the chord data, the current chord name will be displayed in the “CHORD” in name will be displayed data, the current chord If the Song contains the chord segment (see Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration display Memory Bank Selection (page 132). function is ON, an “F”When the Freeze appears (page indication 133). When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” indication appears (page 86). Pressing one of (page indication appears When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” 32). part (page for each Selection display Voice the [A]–[C] and [F]–[H] buttons calls up the • • • he Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the cur- such current basic settings of the instrument the shows he Main display here are two basic display types – Main and Selection. Here are explanations of Here are explanations and Selection. types – Main display basic here are two 7 8 9 ) ! 6 5 2 3 4 1 T The to see them at a single glance. you and Style, allowing Voice rently selected the keyboard. play you usually see when you’ll is the one Main display Main Display Selection Display) Selection T and its basic operation. segment display each Basic Displays (Main Display and File and File Display (Main Displays Basic Basic Operation 66 • • File SelectionDisplayConfiguration V T File SelectionDisplayConfigurationandBasicOperation Basic Displays(MainDisplayandFileSelectionDisplay) selection buttons STYLE category he File Selectiondisplay appearswhen you pressoneofthebuttonsshown below. From hereyou canselect oices, Styles,andotherdata. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Y T Data filesandfolders Location (drive)ofdata (preset) dataisstored. Location wherepre-programmed Preset Hereafter in this manual, any disk,etc.Hereafter inthismanual, USBstoragedevice memory/floppy suchasUSBflash willbe referred toas “USB storaged ou candropfilesintoafolder. he data,bothpre-programmed andyour own original,aresaved as“files.” F Icon F older older edited dataissaved. Location whererecordedor User SONG SELECTbutton File (USB flashmemory/floppy disk,etc)issaved. Location wheredataonUSBstorage device USB V OICE category selectionbuttonsOICE category selection buttons REGIST BANK e vice.” Basic Operation 67 [A]–[J] → [A] SONG/[B] → ou can also select the specified ou can also select the specified Select the file to which the Select the data is saved. Y the data is to be file to which [USB]/ pressing the by saved [USER] buttons. [USB]/[USER] STYLE/[F] VOICE STYLE/[F] VOICE CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] ] π π π π ® ][ ]–[7 √ 3 π π π π 4 3 ] buttons for Song Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Selection and File (Main Display Displays Basic π π π π 1 ]–[6 π π π π older—is shown. Each folder shown in shown Each folder older—is shown. This display shows the Voice files Voice the shows This display in a folder. this case, highest level—in The next f contains appropriately cat- this display Voices. egorized ] buttons for Voice, [1 ] buttons for Voice, π π π π ]–[5 π π π π 2 3 ] (UP) button. π Select the file by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] dial, then press the [ENTER] ENTRY] using the [DATA Select the file by button to execute. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons. buttons. and Style). • to the previous display. Press the [EXIT] button to return Select the file. There are two ways to do so. Select the file. There are two ways • Select the tab containing the desired file by using the TAB [ file by using the TAB Select the tab containing the desired file by using the [1 Select the page containing the desired buttons ([1 close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press folder, the next highest level close the current folder and call up he PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. files are categorized and contained Voice he PRESET Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display Example of the PRESET Voice T Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level Closing the current folder and folder To the [8 4 3 2 1 File Selection Display Basic Operation Basic Display File Selection Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display

•Saving Files ...... page 69 • Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)...... page 70 •Moving Files (Cut & Paste)...... page 71 • Deleting Files/Folders...... page 71 • Renaming Files/Folders...... page 72 • Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of ﬁle name) ...... page 72 • Creating a New Folder ...... page 72 • Entering characters...... page 73

Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the format operation. CAUTION

Basic Operation The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage medias.

The indications USB 1, USB 2, 1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the [USB TO etc. will be displayed depending DEVICE]. on the number of the connected devices. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®]MEDIA 3 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the “USB” Tabs (USB1/USB2) connected to the devices in step 1. 4 Press the [H] button to format the media.

3 4

68 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 69 he internal memory capacity of he internal all file his capacity applies to Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity T 3.2MB. the instrument is about T Style, Voice, types, including data files. Song, and Registration CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] (CANCEL) button. button. ] (CANCEL) Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Selection and File (Main Display Displays Basic † ] buttons. ® ][ √ ] (OK) button to save the file. ] (SAVE) button to call up the file naming display. button to call up ] (SAVE) π π † † π π † † he saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position he saved he File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind Keep for the corresponding data appears. display Selection he File T among the files in alphabetical order. Enter the file name (page 73). Press the [8 press the [8 operation, to cancel the Save want If you Press the [6 Select the appropriate tab (USER/USB) to which you want to save the Select the appropriate tab (USER/USB) to which you want to save the [ data by using the TAB After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR CREATOR in the relevant SONG a Song or Voice After you’ve created display button. the [SAVE] press or VOICE SET display, T Selection display. from the File is executed operation that the Save his operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve you’ve Voices as Songs and data (such original your save you lets his operation 4 5 3 2 1 T a file. created) to Saving Files Saving Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

Restrictions for protected Songs Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the ﬁle names. The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below.

Prot. 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These cannot be copied/moved/saved to USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Edit Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device.

Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song ﬁle operation Basic Operation Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time.

Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste) This operation lets you copy a ﬁle/folder and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to copy. 2 Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the ﬁle/folder. The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/ folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all files/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7†] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection. To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to paste the ﬁle/folder, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons.

6 Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder. The folder/file copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order.

70 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 71 ormatting a USB storage device ormatting a USB storage Deleting all data in a USB storage device at once F all data on the completely erases device (page 68). USB storage CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Selection and File (Main Display Displays Basic ] (CANCEL) button. ] (CANCEL) † ] (CANCEL) button. ] (CANCEL) † ] (ALL OFF) button again. ] (ALL OFF) button again. † † ] buttons. ® ][ √ ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. ] (DELETE) button. ] (OK) button to confirm the file selection. button to paste the file. ] (PASTE) ] (CUT) button to cut the file. ] (CUT) button to ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the cur- ] (ALL) button to select all files indicated on the current dis- ] (ALL) button to select all files indicated † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † Selecting all files/folders Selecting all files cancel the Delete operation, press the [8 cancel the Delete operation, cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. cancel the selection, press the [6 cancel the Cut operation, press the [8 cancel the Cut operation, cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. cancel the selection, cancel the selection, press the [6 ANCEL ...... Cancel the Delete operation he pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the for the Delete operation he pop-up window he file moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position at and pasted appears on the display he file moved he pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the dis- appears at the bottom of Cut operation for the he pop-up window Follow the on-display instructions. YES ...... Delete the file/folder ALLYES ...... Delete all selected files/folders NO ...... Leave the file/folder as is without deleting C Press the [7 To Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/ folder. To ■ Press the [6 including the other pages. rent display To Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to delete. Call up the display containing the Press the [5 T display. To to which the file is to be Select the destination tab (USER/USB) [ pasted, by using the TAB Press the [4 T among the files in alphabetical order. Press the [7 T play. the desired file. [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to Press one of the To ■ Press the [6 Call up the display containing the file you want to move. the file you display containing Call up the Press the [2 including the other pages. play To his operation lets you delete a file/folder. lets you his operation his operation lets you cut a file and paste it to another location (folder). and paste it to another cut a file you lets his operation 5 4 3 2 1 Deleting Files/Folders T 6 5 4 3 2 T 1 Moving Files (Cut & Paste) Files (Cut Moving Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

Renaming Files/Folders This operation lets you rename ﬁles/folders.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to rename. 2 Press the [1†] (NAME) button. The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. 4 Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.

5 Input the name (characters) of the selected file or folder (page 73). The renamed folder/file appears on the display at the appropriate position Basic Operation among the files in alphabetical order.

6 Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the Left of File Name) You can select custom icons for ﬁles (shown at the left of ﬁle name).

1–4 Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders” section.

5 Press the [1†] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display. 6 Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [®] button to select different pages. To cancel the operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.

7 Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the selected icon. 8 Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Creating a New Folder This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and organized as desired, making it easier to find and select your original data. A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab. 1 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to create a new folder. Folder directories for the USER tab display † In the USER tab display, folder 2 Press the [7 ] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a directories can contain up to new folder. four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 2550, but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files/folders which can be stored in a folder 3 Input the name of the new folder (page 73). in the USER tab is 250.

72 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 73 ] † he following half-size marks he following haracter marks (with the excep- haracter haracter entry you are working are working entry you haracter in the lyrics editing haracters button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). In the case of characters which which In the case of characters special are not accompanied by c tion of kanakan and half-size can call up the katakana), you the [6 pressing mark list by Depending on the display for Depending on the display c can- in, some types of characters not be entered. as the select Japanese if you Even enter the you Language, when c Internet (page 166), the display or (page 183), Setting display website, the type of characters be entered. may “CASE”/“case” T cannot be entered for a ﬁle/ folder name. \ / : * ? " < > | WEP key of or Entering password wireless LAN connection in the are website, those characters to “*“. converted CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] button. Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Selection and File (Main Display Displays Basic π π π π ] (DELETE) button. † ] buttons, corresponding to the π π ] (DELETE) button. To delete all charac- To ] (DELETE) button. π π † ] and [7 ] (OK) button. † † † † π bers (full size), marks (full size) bers (half size), marks (half size) size), marks (half size) size), marks (half size) π π π π ]–[6 ] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and † † † † Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the are assigned to each button, characters different Several press the button. change each time you characters π π π π π π π π ] button before actual entry of the character. ] button to call up the mark list. (kana-kan) ...Hiragana and Kanji, marks (full size) † † (kana) ...... Katakana (normal size), marks (full size) (kana) ...... Katakana (half size), marks (half size) After actually entering a character by moving the cursor, press the the cursor, moving by After actually entering a character [6 the cursor to the desired mark, dial to move ENTRY] Use the [DATA then press the [8 ASE...... Alphabet half size), numbers (half (capital letters, Entering marks Deleting characters Entering special character marks (Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ters on the line at once, press and hold the [7 1 2 Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA using the [DATA wish to delete by you the cursor to the character Move dial, and press the [7 ENTRY] Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press a character to which Select a character the [6 ABC...... Alphabet small letters, half size), num- (capital and A B C...... Alphabet small letters, full size), num- (capital and If you select a language other than Japanese as the Language other than Japanese as the If you select a language (page are available: different types of characters 63), the following C case ...... Alphabet letters, half size), numbers (half (lowercase (page 63), the following If you select Japanese as the Language sizes can be entered: different types of characters and • • • • • or details on entering characters, refer to the following section, below section, below to the following refer or details on entering characters, Press the [8 return to the previous display. the cursor or moving and symbols can be done by Entering letters, numerals for a can wait you Alternately, entry buttons. pressing one of the character will be entered automatically. short time and the characters Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired position. dial to move the cursor ENTRY] Use the [DATA Press the [2 character you wish to enter. F instruction step 4. Change the type of character by pressing the [1 Change the type he instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles/ naming your in to enter characters how you show that follow he instructions 4 3 2 1 T The function/website. for Music Finder the Keyword entering when folders and a conventional and numbers to as entering names the same much method is below. shown display should be done in the characters mobile phone. Entering Entering Characters Entering Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

• Inserting a Character 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above. 2 Press the [2π†]–[6π†], [7π] buttons to enter numbers and symbols. 3 Press the [8π] (OK) button to enter characters. • Entering a Space 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above. 2 Press [6†] button to call up the mark list. 3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space (blank) of the mark list, and press the [8π] (OK) button. • Entering numbers First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” ”CASE“ (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2π†]– [5π†], [6π] and [7π] button, for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. Basic Operation • Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the [1π]/[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. To actually enter the change, press the [1†]/[8π] (OK) button or enter the next character. When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted): • Re-converting the characters into other kanji Press the [1π]/[ENTER] button. • Changing the reversed area Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial. • Changing the converted kanji back to “hiragana” Press the [7†] (DELETE) button. • Clearing the reversed area at once Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. • Entering the “hiragana” itself (without converting it) Press the [8π] (OK) button. • Canceling the character-entering operation Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Restoring the Factory-programmed System The operation of restoring the factory-programmed settings does not affect the Internet Set- While holding the C7 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the [POWER] but- tings. To reset the Internet Set- ton ON. tings, refer to page 187. This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore operation explained in step 2 of the following section.

74 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 75 CAUTION This operation deletes all your This operation deletes respec- original data for the USER tive item (MIDI SETUP, FINDER, and MUSIC EFFECT, FILES&FOLDERS). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Restoring the Factory-programmedRestoring Settings ] buttons. † † † † π π π π ] button. π π π π ]SYSTEM RESET ]SYSTEM RESET ]–[3 ® ® † † † † π π π π AB[ AB[ T T 3 → → 2 [J] UTILITY [J] UTILITY → → emporarily deletes the current Registration deletes the current emporarily Memory settings of the selected Bank. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button The selected Bank. on the keyboard). holding the B6 key (right-most B key ON while Deletes all ﬁles User tab display. and folders stored in the T Restores the System Setup parametersRestores the System Setup factory resettings. to the original List booklet for details about whichRefer to the separate Data parameters Setup. belong to the System tab including the MIDI templates on the User Restores the MIDI settings to the original factory status. display user effect types, user master Restores the User Effect settings including the user vocalEQ types, user master compressor types, and types cre- harmony original factory resettings. ated via the Mixing Console display to the Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory resettings. data (all records) to the Restores the Music Finder 4 Make all desired settings on the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory programmed settings by pressing the [4 Press the [D] button to execute the Factory all Reset operation for checkmarked items. Call up the operation display. Call up the operation [FUNCTION] the [1 Select items by pressing REGIST FILES&FOLDERS SYSTEM SETUP MIDI SETUP USER EFFECT MUSIC FINDER or the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall. Original Settings as a Single File your can save you or the items below, 1 2 F Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as Original Settings Saving and Recalling Your a Single File 4 3 2 1 Independently by Item by Independently Restoring the Factory-programmedRestoring Settings Data Backup

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data.

SYSTEM SETUP Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY and microphone setting display are handled as a single System Setup ﬁle. Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup.

MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are handled as a single ﬁle.

USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master EQ types, user master compressor types, and user vocal harmony types created via the Mixing Console displays are managed as a single ﬁle.

MUSIC FINDER All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single ﬁle.

4 Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. Note that the ﬁle in the PRESET tab display is the ﬁle of factory-programmed settings. If you select it, the factory-programmed settings for the respective

Basic Operation item will be restored. (This is the same results as on page 75 “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item”.)

5 Save your file (page 69). 6 To recall your file, select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the file (same tab and page as specified in step 4), and press the corresponding [A]–[J] button.

Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged. Data that can be saved 1 Song*, Style, Registration Memory Bank and Voice 2 Music Finder Record, Effect**, MIDI Template and System File * Protected Songs (those with a “Prot.1/Prot.2” indication at the upper left of the ﬁle name) cannot be saved. However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation) to a USB ﬂash memory. **Effect data includes the following: - Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console “EFFECT/EQ/CMP.” - Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type. 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above, as well as the Internet settings.

The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1, 2, and 3 above.

76 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 77 ] ] ® ® ][ ][ √ √ Data Backup Data AB [ AB [ T T → → CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s [J] UTILITY [J] UTILITY → → ] buttons. ® ][ √ restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE) restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE) operation. 409/407 cannot be restored. It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore has not been created on the CVP- data which Backup WNER AB [ Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] save the Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to data to the USB storage device. To button in step 3 above. • • Insert/connect the backup USB storage the backup Insert/connect device (destination). display. Call up the operation [FUNCTION] SYSTEM RESET [F]–[I] buttons to call up Press one of the for saving your data. the relevant display USB tab to which Select the appropriate the data by using the you want to save T Save your data (page 69). Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). O Music Finder Record, Effect, MIDI Tem- Record, Effect, Music Finder System Data plate and All data listed in 1 and 2 above CAUTION 2 3 n Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER display before restoring. If the songs are not moved, the operation deletes the data. 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 ] † ] (ALL † ] (PASTE) button to paste ] (PASTE) ] (ALL) button to select all ] (COPY) button to copy the ] (OK) button to conﬁrm the † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † ] buttons. ® ][ ] buttons. √ ® ][ cancel the Copy operation, press the [8 operation, cancel the Copy

cancel the selection, press the [6 oice: AB [ he pop-up window for the Copy operation operation for the Copy he pop-up window √ Press the [4 the file/folder. OFF) button again. file/folder selection. To button. (CANCEL) Select the destination USB tab to which the file/folder is to be copied, by using the T files/folders indicated on the current dis- files/folders indicated on the current play and all other pages. To Press the [7 Press the [6 Select the USER tab by using the TAB TAB Select the USER tab by using the [ Press the [3 file/folder. T appears at the bottom of the display. Call up the display containing the desired Call up the display file to be copied. Song: button. Press the [SONG SELECT] Style: Press the STYLE category selection buttons. Registration Memory Bank: MEM- Press simultaneously REGISTRATION . buttons [+][–] [REGIST BANK] ORY V category selection but- VOICE Press one of the tons. Insert/connect the backup USB storage Insert/connect the device (destination). Song, Style, Registration Memory Registration Song, Style, Bank and Voice Data and Voice Protected Songs (“Prot. 1/Prot.2” is indicated at the upper left side of the file names) are protected These included in the copied files. Songs Songs cannot be copied. However, (cut- with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved to a USB flash memory. and-paste operation) If a message appears indicating data cannot be copied 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Backup procedure Backup Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing Voices ...... page 28 Playing the Piano Voice ...... page 28 Playing Various Voices...... page 32

Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name.

Reference Natural! These rich and luscious Voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts. They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling, Dynamic Sampling, Sustain Sampling, and Key-off Sampling. S. Articulation! The Super Articulation voices sound remarkably authentic and natural, featuring the unique performance characteristics of each instrument—for example, guitar scratching sounds or the legato phrasing of wind instruments. They provide many of the same beneﬁts as the MegaVoices (see below), but with greater playability and expressive control in real time. To effectively play these natural sounds in performance of certain voices, you may need to use the pedal or footswitch. For details on how to best play each voice, call up the Information window (pressing the [7π] button in the Voice Selection display).

Mega Voices Compatibility Mega Voice The Mega Voices are not intended to be played from the keyboard. They are Mega Voices are unique to the primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such as songs Clavinova and are not compati- and styles). Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been cre- ble with other models. Any song/ ated as Mega Voices. style data you’ve created on the What makes Mega Voices special is their use of velocity switching. Normal Clavinova using the Mega Voices Voices use velocity switching, too—to make the sound quality and/or level of a

Using, Creating and Editing Voices Using, Creating and Editing will not sound properly when Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the instrument’s played back on other instru- Voices sound authentic and natural. However, with Mega Voices, each velocity ments. range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound. For example, a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with Mega Voices, a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice, using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds. Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are, however, very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part. Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound—full of atmosphere and ambience. Cool! These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments—thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology—and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Live!Drums These are high-quality drum sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic Sampling. Live!SFX These are high-quality Latin percussion sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic sampling. They give you a broader and more versatile range of Latin percussion than the normal drum Voices. Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Organ Flutes! This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 103 for details.

78 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Reference Using, Creating and Editing Voices 79 Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range) See page 111. Adjusting the volume balance among parts balance Adjust the volume among the parts in the BALANCE (page 40). display CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Voices Different Playing Right 1 part Right 2 part Right 1 part Left part Left part Right 1 part Right 2 part Right 1 part he keyboard lamp will light at the split point of the keyboard. ou can combine these three parts to create a rich, ensemble sound. ou can combine these three parts to create a rich, ou can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, try play- For with the left and right hands. Voices different ou can play ou can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for nor- This the entire keyboard range. over Voice a single ou can play Refer to page 81 for Voice selection operations for the Left part. for the Left selection operations Voice Refer to page 81 for with the Left and Right Hands Dual+Split: Playing Three Different Voices (Right 1, 2 and Left parts) Y Split: Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and with the Left Split: Playing Different Voices Left parts) Y right. with your Voice left hand and the piano with your Voice ing the bass T Dual: Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts) Simultaneously Voices Dual: Playing Two Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part) Playing a single Voice Y Voice. the piano mal performance—for example, with ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are Make sure the PART turned off. oices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1, Right 2, and keyboard independently to each oices can be assigned he instrument keyboard features various functions and performance conveniences performance conveniences functions and various keyboard features he instrument ou can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound. thicker to create a Voices similar duet or combine two ou can simulate a melody ■ ■ Refer to page 80 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part. for the Right selection operations Voice Refer to page 80 for Y ■ ■ Keyboard Part Combinations Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a the PART using combine these parts by can You Left. sound. ensemble rich, V Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) Parts (Right 1, Right Keyboard neously T several to play you on an acoustic instrument. It allows that are simply unavailable you left hand while with your Voice one or play together in a layer, Voices different right. with your Voices!) layered two (or even Voice a different play Playing Different Voices Simulta- Voices Different Playing Using, Creating and Editing Voices 80 Playing DifferentVoices Simultaneously and offwhile you play. is usefulforturningtheDualon 191). Thispriately assigned;page OFF [DUAL(RIGHT2)]isappro- Dual on/off(when thePART ON Y with apedal Switching theDualon/off 2 part. pressed buttonissetfortheRight w cally setfortheRight1part, ﬁrst pressedbuttonisautomati- press another. The Voice ofthe category selectionbutton,then tons. Pressandholdone VOICE VO 1 and2part Voices, justfromthe Y Right 1and2parts Quickly selectingVoices for V mark appearsattherightof F or theselectedpart,aLEFT ou canuseapedaltoswitch the ou canquickly selecttheRight oice nameintheMaindisplay. hile the Voice ofthesecond CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual ICE categoryselectionbut- / Dual on. Y and 2Parts) Playing Two Voices Simultaneously(Right1 5 4 3 2 1 6 ou canplay two Voices simultaneouslywiththeRight1and2partsby turning Press thePART ON/OFF[DUAL(RIGHT2)]buttonagaintoturnitoff. Play thekeyboard. Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaVoice. Press theTAB [ selection displayfortheRight2part. selectionbuttonstocalluptheVoicePress oneoftheVOICEcategory simultaneously withtheRight1and2parts. Press thePART ON/OFF[DUAL(RIGHT2)]buttontoplaytwoVoices 4 √ ] buttontoselectthePRESETdisplay. 4 3 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts)

You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts) by turning Split on.

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button to play different Voices with the Right and Left Hands (Right 1 and Left parts). For the selected part, a RIGHT mark appears at the left of the Voice name in the Main display.

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Left part. Using, Creating and Editing Voices

3 Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display.

4 4

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. 5 Play the keyboard.

Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button again to turn it off. Switching the Split on/off 6 with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Split on/off (when the PART ON/ OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] is appropriately assigned; page 191). This is useful for turning the Split on and off while you play.

Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range) See page 111.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 81 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 82 Enhancing theAcousticRealismofSound(iAFC) tronic MicrophoneRotator)tech iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Elec- speaker isblocked. effect cannotbeobtainedifthis the instrument. The optimaliAFC the rearpanel(CVP-409/407)of (CVP-409 grand pianotype)or the undersideofkeyboard or cover thespeakerlocatedon When usingiAFC,donotblock • •W acoustic feedback. nology toensurestabilityagainst •W following cases. iAFC cannotbeusedinthe (CVP-409 grand pianotype) with theshorterstay. When thelidisclosedoropen Off. nected. and headphonesarecon- Headphones SW(page17), CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual hen theSpeakersettingis hen theSpeakersettingis - also performanautomaticadjustmentinordertoobtaintheoptimaliAFCeffect. T that occurwhen you pressthedamperpedalofagrand piano. beration thatarecharacteristic ofperformingonstageorsimulatesthesustainsound to anacousticmusicalinstrument. This letsyou experiencetheambienceandrever- When iAFCisengaged,theinstrumentwillsounddeeperandmoreresonant,similar the Sound(iAFC) Enhancing theAcousticRealismof 2 1 tion canbeset. T Adjusting theiAFCDepth 3 he depthoftheacousticpianoresonancesimulationandstageambiencesimula- his sectiondescribeshow tomakevarious settingsfortheiAFCfunction. You can turned on. When thelidisclosedoropenwithshorterstay, theiAFCwillnotbe To T urning ontheiAFCofCVP-409grandpianotype turnontheiAFC,openlidwithlongerstay usingtheinnerrecess. • EFFECT depth. Press the[3 Press the[D]buttontoturniAFCon. [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. duced withintheinstrumentisprocessedtocreateaspacious sensation. pedal ofagrand piano. The microphoneisnot used,butthesoundpro- T DYNAMIC DAMPEREffect his simulatesthesustainsoundthatoccurswhen you pressthedamper 2 π π π π → † † † † [H]iAFCSETTING ]/[4 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoadjusttheDYNAMICDAMPER 34 Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound (iAFC)

4 Press the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to adjust the SPATIAL EFFECT depth. If you select the “SPATIAL EFFECT”, make sure to execute the calibration operation (see below). •SPATIAL EFFECT Spatial Effect creates a sense of reverberation and spaciousness by picking up the output sound using internal microphones and output the sound from the speaker on the underside (CVP-409 grand piano type) or the rear (CVP-409/ 407) of the instrument. The spread and spaciousness of the sound is different depending on the depth. The default setting for the depth is 0. For lower depth settings: This creates the resonance and enhances the acoustic realism of the sound that is characteristic of acoustic instruments by creating a virtual soundboard. For deeper depth settings: The sound of the instrument itself and the sound of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by internal microphones, and processed to simulate the spatial characteristics of performing together on stage. Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Calibrating the iAFC Settings

This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect will be obtained. Make sure to execute this operation when you use “SPATIAL EFFECT.”

1 Press the [I] (MIC CALIBRATION) button in the iAFC operation display (page 82) to call up the calibration display.

2 Press the [G] (CALIBRATION START) button to begin calibration. When automatic adjust begins, a test sound (noise) will sound for about ﬁve seconds. While automatic adjustment is being performed, do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova.

If the iAFC effect is slight or inaudible: If it seems that iAFC is not effective when playing back Songs or Styles, turn the iAFC feature off. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [H] iAFC SETTING 2 Press the [D] button to turn iAFC off.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 83 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 84 Changing Pitch sound wave vibrates inasecond. represents thenumberoftimesa to thefrequency ofasoundand T Hz (Hertz): or SFXKit Voices. tion doesnotaffecttheDrumKit Please notethatthe Tune func- his unitofmeasurementrefers CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 1 [iAFC Default] Restoring theDefaultCalibrationSetting 2 1 instrument alongwithotherinstrumentsorCDmusic. Y Fine-tuning thePitchofEntireInstrument Tr T Changing Pitch 2 1 periods ormusicgenres. Y Scale Tuning •T •T ou canﬁne-tunethepitch oftheentireinstrument—usefulwhen you play the ou canselectvarious scalesforplaying incustomtuningsforspeciﬁchistorical anspose thepitch ofthekeyboardupordown (insemitones). ranspose sound oftheinstrument(MASTER),respectively. transposition forthekeyboardpitch (KBD),songplayback (SONG),oroverall Change thetranspose settingsintheMIXINGCONSOLEdisplay. You cansetthe ment by pressingthe TRANSPOSE [–]/[+]buttons. Y 2 1 ou caneasilysetthedesiredtransposition oftheoverall soundoftheinstru- ransposing beforeperformance ransposing duringperformance TUNE Use the[1 (page 82)tocallupthecalibrationdisplay. Press the[I](MICCALIBRATION) buttonintheiAFCoperationdisplay [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. the factoryresettingof440.0Hz. Press the4or5’s [ Use the[4 [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. [MIXING CONSOLE] Call uptheoperationdisplay. Press the[J](BASICSETTING)buttontorestoredefaultsetting. π π π π π π π π † † † † † † † † → → ]/[5 ]–[3 [A]MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE [A]MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE π π π π π π π π π ] and[ → † † † † † † † † T ] buttonstosetthetuning. AB [ ] buttonstosetthetransposition. † ] buttonssimultaneouslytoresetthevalue to √ ][ ® ] TUNE → → T T AB [ AB [ ® √ ] SCALE TUNE ] MASTER Changing Pitch

2 Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons. Checkmark the box by pressing the [8π] button.

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display.

4 Change the following settings as necessary. •Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE) 1 Press the [3π†] button to select the note for tuning. π† π† Cent: 2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the tuning in cents. In musical terms a “cent” is 1/ 100th of a semitone. (100 cents • Determines the base note for each scale. equal one semitone.) Press the [2π†] button to select the base note. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. Instantly recalling the desired scale Register the desired scale to the

Preset Scale Types Registration Memory. Be sure to Using, Creating and Editing Voices checkmark the SCALE item when EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with registering (page 131). TEMPERAMENT each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. PURE MAJOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, PURE MINOR especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing. PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popu- lar from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. WERCKMEISTER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger sys- KIRNBERGER tems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ARABIC Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents) CC# DEb EFF# GAb ABb B EQUAL TEM- 0 00 0 0 0000000 PERAMENT PURE MAJOR 0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 PURE MINOR 0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 PYTHAGOREAN 0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 MEAN-TONE 0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 WERCKMEISTER 0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 KIRNBERGER 0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 ARABIC 1 00-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0 ARABIC 2 0000-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 * In the display, the rounded off value is shown.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 85 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 86 Adding EffectstoVoices PlayedontheKeyboard wide range ofeffects. the digitalrealmtoproducea and enhancestheaudiosignalin sor (orProcessing).DSPchanges Stands forDigitalSignalProces- DSP: CONSOLE display (page90). time) canbesetviatheMIXING mento time(thepitch transition keyboard tothenext. The porta- from theﬁrstnoteplayed onthe ates asmoothtransition inpitch P Portamento: (page 191). Harmony/Echo effects onandoff Y ortamento isafunctionthatcre ou canuseapedaltoturnthe CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual - add extraordinary depthandexpressiontoyour sound. T the Keyboard Adding EffectstoVoices Playedon Effect Parameters 4 3 2 1 LEFT HOLD V DSP/DSP MONO/POLY ECHO HARMONY/ he instrumentfeaturesasophisticatedmulti-processoreffectsystemwhich can ARIATION to theVoices. Use thebuttonsatlower/rightpartofdisplaytoapplyeffects Press the[VOICEEFFECT]buttontocallupVOICEEFFECTdisplay. one ofthe[A]–[C],[F]–[H]buttons. Select thedesiredpartforwhichyouwanttoaddeffectsbypressing [DIRECT ACCESS] Call uptheoperationdisplay. •T y depth toyour music inavariety ofways—such asaddingreverbthatmakes W control thePortamento effect(dependingontheselected Voice) by playing legato. sounds (such asbrass instruments)morerealistically. Italsoletsyou expressively at atime)orpolyphonically. UsingtheMONOmodeletsyou play single,lead T pressed). type voices such aspianodecay moreslowly (asifthesustainpedalhasbeen released. Non-decaying voices such asstringsareheldcontinuously, while decay- Th •T T ou soundlikeyouareplaying inaconcerthall. his determineswhether thepart’s Voice isplayed monophonically(onlyonenote he Harmony/Echo typesareappliedtotheright-hand Voices87). (page ith the digital effects built into the instrument, you canaddambienceand ith thedigitaleffectsbuiltintoinstrument,you or offforthecurrentlyselectedkeyboard part. ing speed(slow/fast)oftherotary speakereffect. effect. You couldusethiswhileyou play, forexample,tochangetherotat- is functioncausestheLEFTpart Voice tobeheldeven when thekeysare he DSPswitch isusedtoturn theDSP(DigitalSignalProcessor)effecton he DSP Variation switch isusedtochange between variations oftheDSP → [EXIT] Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types. In order to make the type you’ve selected here effective, set HARMONY/ECHO to On in the display shown in step 4 above.

1 Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button. 2 Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type (see below).

3 Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings (page 88). The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.

Harmony/Echo Types The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied.

Harmony Types Using, Creating and Editing Voices These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord speciﬁed in the left-hand section of the keyboard. (Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.) Echo Types Multi Assign Type These types apply echo This type applies a special effect to effects to notes played in chords played in the right-hand section the right-hand section of of the keyboard. the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo.

● Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected Canceling the chord sound above and the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the keyboard shown below. for the harmony effect This cancels the sound of the chord played in the chord range of the keyboard—letting you hear only the Harmony effect. Set [ACMP ON/OFF] to On, set [SYNC START] to Off, and select Split point Split point “Off” for the Stop Accompani- ment parameter.

Chord section for Style playback and Left Voice and Right 1 Harmony effect chord section for Right 2 Harmony effect Voices

Split Point Split Point (for Style) (for keyboard Voice)

Chord section Left Voice Right 1 for Style Right 2 playback and Voices Harmony effect

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 87 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 88 Editing theVolume andTonal Balance(MIXINGCONSOLE) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual and Right2 Voices arealternatelyassignedtothenotesinorderyouplay. 1] and[RIGHT2]shouldbeturnedonwhenusingtheMulti Assign effect. The Right1 section ofthekeyboardtoseparateparts(Voices). Bothofthekeyboardpart[RIGHT Multi Assign effectautomaticallyassignsnotesplayed simultaneously intheright-hand ● Basic Procedure mum balanceandstereoimage,letsyou sethow theeffectsareapplied. It letsyou adjustthelevels andstereoposition(pan)ofeach Voice tosettheopti- and Song/Stylechannels, includingvolume balanceandthetimbreofsounds. T (MIXING CONSOLE) Editing theVolume andTonal Balance Harmony/Echo Settings (last two notesifmorethantwo notesareheld),anditplays thosenotesalternately. in mindthat Trill works when you holddown two notesonthekeyboardsimultaneously rently settempo,regardlessofthe[ACMP ON/OFF]andtheLEFTparton/offstatus.Keep applied tothenoteplayed intheright-hand sectionofthekeyboardintimewithcur- When oneoftheEcho Types isselected,thecorrespondingeffect(echo,tremolo,trill) ● 1 LIMIT TOUCH ONLY NOTE CHORD SPEED VOLUME ASSIGN he MixingConsolegives you intuitive controlover aspectsofthekeyboardparts Multi AssignType Echo Types 1, 3 SOLE display. Press the[MIXINGCONSOLE]buttontocallup MIXINGCON- above. ItdeterminesthespeedofEcho, Tremolo, and Trill effects. T melody. The harmony effectisappliedwhen you play thekeystrongly(above thesetvalue). tively applytheharmony by your playing strength,lettingyou createharmony accentsinthe the lowest velocity value atwhich theharmony notewillsound. This allows you toselec- T the keyboard)thatbelongstoachord played inthechord sectionofthekeyboard. “ON,” theHarmony effectisappliedonlytothenote(played intheright-handsectionof Th y T the level oftheharmony/echo notesgenerated by theHarmony/Echo effect. T ou determine the keyboard part via which theharmony/echo noteswillbesounded. ou determinethekeyboardpartviawhich his parameter isavailable foralltypeswiththeexceptionof“Multi Assign.” Itdetermines his parameter isavailable foralltypeswiththeexceptionof“Multi Assign.” Itdetermines his parameter isonlyavailable when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill isselectedin Type his parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.”his parameterisavailable foralltypeswiththeexceptionof“Multi This lets is parameter isavailable when oneofthe Harmony Types isselected. When thisissetto 44 5 2 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

2 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 90.

3 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIX- About Parts ING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts. See below. The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different part displays. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. The various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following: PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1–8 display → SONG CH 9–16 display

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter. 5 Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the value. Instantly setting all parts to 6 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings. the same value Once you’ve selected a parame- • Saving the PANEL PART display settings ter in step 4, you can instantly set the same value to all other

Register them to Registration Memory (page 131). Using, Creating and Editing Voices parts. To do this, simultaneously • Saving the STYLE PART display settings hold down one of the [A]–[J] but- Save them as Style data. tons, and use the [1]–[8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [B] STYLE CREATOR 2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. 3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for saving your data, then save it (page 69). • Saving the SONG CH 1–8/9–16 display settings First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP), then save the Song. See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explanation on page 162.

About Parts PANEL PART In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE, you can independently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT), SONG, STYLE, and MIC parts. The part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [BAL- ANCE] button (page 40). STYLE PART A Style consists of eight separate channels. Here you can adjust the level balance among these eight channels or parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHAN- NEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display. SONG CH 1–8/9–16 A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. Here you can adjust the level balance among these sixteen channels or parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 89 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 90 Editing theVolume andTonal Balance(MIXINGCONSOLE) •W •T for aDrumKit Voice. 9–16 page)canonlybeused c and SFXkit Voices. be assignedtoDrumkit Voices STYLE PART display canonly CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual hannel 10(intheSONGCH he RHY2channel inthe hen playing GMsongdata, EFFECT TUNE FILTER VOL/VOICE CONSOLE displays. T plays Adjustable Items(parameters)intheMIXINGCONSOLEDis- DSP CHORUS REVERB TYPE TRANSPOSE TUNING OCTAVE PITCH BENDRANGE PORTAMENTO TIME BRIGHTNESS HARMONIC CONTENT VOLUME P VOICE SONG AUTOREVOICE he following explanationscover theavailable items(parameters) intheMIXING ANPOT Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each partorchannel. Adjusts theamountofDSPsound foreach nel. partorchan- Adjusts theamountofChorussoundforeach nel. soundforeachpartorchan- Adjusts theamountofReverb inal effect. cansaveparameters fortheselectedeffecttype,you itasanorig- 93). Select thedesiredeffecttype(page After editingvarious ment (MASTER),respectively. BOARD), Songplayback (SONG),oroverall soundoftheinstru- Allows you (KEY- tosetthetranspositionforkeyboardpitch Determines thepitchofeach keyboardpart. keyboard part. Determines therangeofpitchchange inoctaves foreach keyboard part(whenapedalisassignedtothisfunction). Determines therangeofPITCHBENDinsemitonesforeach 86). part issettoMono(page no effect. This parameter isavailable when theselectedkeyboard result inalongerpitchchange time. Settingthisto“0”resultsin mento Time determinesthepitchtransition time.Highervalues note playedfrom theﬁrst onthekeyboard tothenext. The Porta- P the cutofffrequency101). (page partby adjusting Determines thebrightnessofsoundforeach part. 101) foreach Allows you toadjusttheresonanceeffect(page control over thebalanceofallparts. Determines thelevelofeach partorchannel, giving you ﬁne Determines thestereopositionofselectedpart(channel). User Voices cannotbeselected. V c Allows you tore-selectthe Voices foreach part. When theStyle See page91. hannels arecalledup,neitherOrganFlutes Voices norUser ortamento is a function that creates a smooth transition inpitch ortamento isafunctionthatcreatessmoothtransition oices canbeselected. When theSongchannelsarecalledup, Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

EQ (Equalizer)

TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the performance environment (page 95). This affects the overall sound of the instrument.

EDIT For editing the EQ (page 95).

EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part.

EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part.

CMP (Master Compressor) See page 97. This affects the overall sound of the instrument.

Song Auto Revoice This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage with XG-compatible song data. When you play back any commercially available XG song data or that created on other instruments, you can use Auto Revoice to Using, Creating and Editing Voices automatically assign the specially created Voices of the instrument (Natural!, Live!, Cool!, etc.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type.

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2, select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP display.

5 Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced.

567

6 Use the [4π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the XG selected in step 5. Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[G]/[I] buttons, for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one action. ALL REVOICE: Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the high-quality Voices of the instrument. PIANO REVOICE: Replaces only the piano Voices. BASIC REVOICE: Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suitable for playing back the song. ALL NO REVOICE: All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 91 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 92 Editing theVolume andTonal Balance(MIXINGCONSOLE) wide range ofeffects. the digitalrealmtoproducea and enhancestheaudiosignalin sor (orProcessing).DSPchanges Stands forDigitalSignalProces- DSP: CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 8 7 5 4 1–3 ■ Effect Type Selecting anEffecttype REVOICE toON. In theVOL/VOICEtabdisplay, pressthe[F]buttontosetSONGAUTO To Press the[8 Use the[1 Press the[F](TYPE)buttontocallupEffectType selectiondisplay. canceltheRevoice operation, pressthe[8 select theEFFECTtab. Same operationasinthe“BasicProcedure”onpage88.Instep2, π π π π π π π π † † † † ] (OK)buttontoapplyyourRevoicesettings. ]/[2 5678 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoselecttheeffectBLOCK. † ] (CANCEL) button. Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

Effect Block Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics

REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously.

DSP1 STYLE PART In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types, SONG CHANNNEL 1–16 the instrument has special DSP effects, that include additional effects usually used for a speciﬁc part, such as distortion and tremolo.

DSP2 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, Any unused DSP blocks are automatically DSP3 SONG CHANNEL 1–16 assigned to the appropriate parts (channels) DSP4 as needed. DSP5

DSP6 Microphone sound Dedicated for use only with the microphone sound. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 6 Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect.

7 Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY. 8 Use the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons to select the effect TYPE. If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the effect

9 Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 93 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 94 Editing theVolume andTonal Balance(MIXINGCONSOLE) nels. T of effectapplied. Determines thelevel oramount Effect ReturnLevel: upper leftsideboxinthedisplay. ﬁguration isdisplayed atthe tons. The re-selected effectcon- Use the[1 andtype category Re-selecting theEffectblock, his issetforallpartsorchan- CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual π† ]–[3 π† ] but- 10 14 13 12 11 15 10 effect block. T the effect. Adjust theEffectReturnLevel by pressing[8 effect blockinstep5: Av v To Y If youhaveselectedoneoftheDSP2–5effectblocksinstep5: When recallingthesaved effect,usethesameprocedure asinstep8. Press the[I](SAVE) buttontosavetheeffect(page 69). Use the[3 nal effect. Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocallupthedisplayforsavingyourorigi- [7 Adjust thevalueforselectedparameterbyusing[6 [5 Select oneoftheparametersyouwanttoeditbyusing[4 ariation parameter, pressthe[E]button. ou canedititsstandardparameters aswellitsvariation parameter. he maximumnumberforeffectsthatcanbesaved differsdependingonthe π π π π π π π π selectthestandardtypeofparameters, pressthe[B]button. To selectits ailable parameters differdependingontheselectedEffecttype. † † † † † † † † ] buttons.IfyouhaveselectedtheREVERB,CHORUSorDSP1 ] buttons. π π π π † † † † ]–[6 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoselectthedestinationforsaving 14 112 11 π† ] button. 15 π π π π 13 † † † † π π π π † † † † ]/ ]/ Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

EQ (Equalizer) Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. The instrument possesses a high-grade five- band digital EQ. With this function, a final effect—tone control can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the EQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types.

Bandwidth Gain (also called “Shape” or “Q”)

0 Freq (Frequency) Using, Creating and Editing Voices

→ 5 bands LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5

■ Select a Preset EQ type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2, select the EQ tab.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your performance (music style or environment). If you want to edit the EQ parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ

5 Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 95 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 96 Editing theVolume andTonal Balance(MIXINGCONSOLE) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 6 9 8 7 6 Use the[8 bands. Use the[A]/[B]buttonstoselectapresetEQtype. EQ type,usethesameprocedureasinstep6. Up totwo typesofEQcanbecreatedandsaved. When recallingthesaved (page 69). Press the[H]or[I](STORE12)buttontosaveeditedEQtype • • band selectedinstep7. Adjust theQ(bandwidth)andFREQ(centerfrequency)of Use the[3 band. Use the[2 FREQ (centerfrequency) width. Use the[1 Bandwidth (alsocalled“Shape”or“Q”) π† π π π π π† π π π π † † † † † † † † ] buttontoboostorcutalltheﬁve bandsatthesametime. ]–[7 ]button. The available FREQrange isdifferentforeach ]button. The higherthevalue ofQ, thenarrower theband 8 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoboostorcuteachoftheﬁve 7 9 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

Master Compressor Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (soft- ness/loudness) of an audio signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as vocals and guitar parts, it “squeezes” the dynamic range, effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound. Compres- sion can be used to increase sustain for electric guitar, smooth out the volume of a vocal, or bring a drum kit or rhythm pattern further up-front in the mix. The instrument has a sophisticated multi-band compressor that allows you to adjust the com- pression effect for individual frequency bands—giving you detailed sonic control. You can edit and save your own custom Compressor types, or conveniently select from one of the presets.

■ Selecting a Master Compressor type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2, select the CMP tab.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master Compressor type. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Selecting a Master Compressor type automatically sets the parameters (at the bottom of the display) to the optimum values for the type.

4 5

5 Press the [F] button to set the Master Compressor to ON. If you want to edit the Master Compressor parameters, go on to the next operation.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 97 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 98 Editing theVolume andTonal Balance(MIXINGCONSOLE) of Threshold. sound oflevels higherthanthat compressor affectsonlythe at which compressionstarts. The Determines theminimumlevel Threshold: CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 6 ■ 9 8 7 10 Editing andSavingtheselectedMasterCompressor T pressed signalatthreeseparatefrequencybands). mum levelatwhichcompressionstarts)andGain(levelofcom- the MasterCompressorsettings. and “HIGH”when you want toemphasizehighfrequencies. F Compressor, orwhichfrequenciescompressionisappliedto. Use the[1 dure asinstep4. When recallingthesaved MasterCompressorsettings, usethesameproce- (page 69). Press the[I](SAVE) buttontosavetheMaster Compressor settings Use the[3 nal MasterCompressorsettings. Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocallupthedisplayforsavingyourorigi- Use the[3 or example,select“LOW” when you want toemphasizelow frequencies, hese values offset thoseofthefrequency curve settingsinstep6. π π π π π π π π π π π π † † † † † † † † † † † † ]/[2 ]–[7 ]–[6 67 π π π π π π π π π π π π † † † † † † † † † † † † ] buttons to select the frequency curve forthe ] buttonstoselectthefrequencycurve ] buttonstodeterminetheThreshold(mini- ] buttonstoselectthedestinationforsaving 9 10 8 Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

Voice Creating (Sound Creator) The instrument has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own Editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voices The editing method is different Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/(USB) display for future recall. for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other compared to other Voices. For Voices. instructions on editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices, see page 103. Basic Procedure

1 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice) (page 32). 2 Press the [6π] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display. Using, Creating and Editing Voices

3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays” on page 100. 3 4

6 7

4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited. CAUTION π† π† 5 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to edit the Voice. If you select another Voice without saving the settings, Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited the settings will be lost. If you 6 wish to store the settings Voice with the unedited Voice. here, make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before 7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 69). selecting another Voice or turning the power off.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 99 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 100 f A keyboard tothenext. from thefirstnoteplayed onthe ates asmoothtransition inpitch P mines thepitch transition time. T Portamento Time: Depth setto64) according to VelOffset (with Changes tovelocity curve TOUCH SENSEOFFSET set to64) according to VelDepth (withOff- Changes tovelocity curve TOUCH SENSEDEPTH according toTouch sensitivity Changes tovelocitycurve depending onthe Voice. T V 127 f Actual Velocity 127 or tonegenerator or tonegenerator 64 64 ortamento isafunctionthatcre- he Portamento Time deter- he available parameters differ ctual Velocity oice Creating(SoundCreator) 0 0 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Offset=96 (+64) offset Depends on offset Depends on (twice) Depth=127 (Actual KeyOn speed) Received Velocity 64 64 Offset=0 (-127) (normal) Depth=64 Ke (Actual V Received 127 elocity 127 yOn speed) (+127) Offset=127 (half) Depth=32 Depth=0 (-64) Offset=32 (normal) Offset=64 ters (page106),which areautomaticallycalledupwhen the Voice isselected. described separately, below. These arealsotreatedaspartofthe Voice Setparame- eters areorganizedintofive differentdisplays. The parameters ineach display are explained instep3ofthe“BasicProcedure”on page 99. The SoundCreatorparam- T Editable ParametersintheVOICESETDisplays degree towhich thepedalmodulates each ofthefollowing parameters. modulate theparameters below aswellthepitch (vibrato). Here,you cansetthe When apedalfunctionisassignedtoMODULATION, thepedalcanbeusedto 1. MODULATION CONTROLLER COMMON T PIANO P PORTAMENTO TIME MONO/POLY TOUCH SENSE VOLUME STRING RESONANCE SUSTAIN SAMPLE KEY OFFSAMPLE TUNING CURVE LFO AMOD LFO FMOD LFO PMOD AMPLITUDE FILTER he following covers indetailtheeditableparameters thataresetinthedisplays his display isavailable onlywhen theNatural! piano Voice (page78)isselected. ART OCTAVE LEFT part, the LEFT parameter isavailable.LEFT part,theparameter R1/R2 parameterisavailable; when theedited Voice isusedas the When theedited Voice isusedasanyoftheRIGHT1–2parts, Shifts theoctave range oftheedited Voice upordowninoctaves. polyphonically (page 86). polyphonically (page Determines whether theedited Voice isplayed monophonicallyor OFFSET DEPTH v Adjusts thetouchsensitivity (velocity sensitivity), orhowgreatlythe Adjusts thevolume ofthecurrentedited Voice. Adjusts thedepthofstringresonance. Adjusts thedepthofsustainsamplingfordamperpedal. occurs when you releaseakey). Adjusts thevolume ofthekey-offsound(the subtlesoundthat FLAT STRETCH ments Voices. curve ofthepiano Voice doesnotquite matchthatofotherinstru- Select“FLAT”Determines thetuningcurve. ifyou feelthetuning or thetremoloeffect. Determines thedegree towhich thepedalmodulates theamplitude, modulation, orthewaheffect. Determines thedegreetowhich thepedalmodulatesFilter the vibrato effect. or Determines thedegreetowhich thepedalmodulatespitch, (volume). Determines thedegreetowhich thepedalmodulatesamplitude off Frequency. For detailsaboutthefilter,101. see page Determines thedegreetowhich Cut- thepedalmodulatesFilter Sets theportamentotimewhen theedited Voice issetto“MONO”above. olume respondstoyourplaying strength. for theactualvelocityeffect. Determines theamountbywhich received velocities areadjusted v Determines thevelocitysensitivity, or how much thelevelof entire keyboardrange T T uning curveinwhich thefrequency isoctave doubledover the uning curveparticularlyforpianos oice changes inresponsetoyourplaying strength(velocity). Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

2. LEFT PEDAL This allows you to select the function to be assigned to the left pedal.

FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the left pedal. For details on the pedal functions, see page 191. [2π†]–[8π†] but- Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the tons (RIGHT 1, RIGHT respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the 2, LEFT, etc.) function. For details, see page 192.

SOUND ● FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a speciﬁc frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer–like effects.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the ﬁlter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Volume Cutoff frequency

Frequency (pitch) These frequencies are Cutoff range “passed” by the ﬁlter.

HARMONIC CONTENT Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect.

Volume

Resonance

Frequency (pitch)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 101 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 102 is properlyassigned;page191). VIBE ROTOR ON/OFFfunction VIBE ROTOR on/off(when the Y on/off withapedal Switching theVIBEROTOR V larly modulatingthepitch ofthe effect thatisproducedby regu- A quavering, vibrating sound V V ou canuseapedaltoswitch the oice. ibrato: oice Creating(SoundCreator) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 1. REVERBDEPTH/CHORUSDEPTH/DSPDEPTH EFFECT/EQ ● the longreleaseofasustainedpianotone. acoustic instruments—such asthequick attack anddecay ofpercussion sounds,or c T ● VIBE ROTOR DSP ON/OFF DSP DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH DELAY SPEED RELEASE DECAY ATT REVERB DEPTH DEPTH hanges intime. This letsyou reproducemany soundcharacteristics ofnatural he EG(Envelope Generator) settingsdeterminehow thelevel ofthesound VIBRATO EG ACK Pitch VIBRATE selectingthe shouldbesettoonoroffwhen Voice. T T Determines whether theDSPisonoroff. 103. page menu explainedon If you want candosointheDSP tore-selecttheDSPtype,you 93) depth. Adjusts theDSP(page 93) depth. Adjusts thechorus (page 93) depth. Adjusts thereverb(page delay ofthe Vibrato onset. a keyandthestartof Vibrato effect.Highersettingsincreasethe of Determines theamountoftimethatelapsesbetweenplaying Determines thespeedof Vibrato effect. in amorepronounced Vibrato. Determines theintensityof Vibrato effect.Highersettingsresult released. The lower thevalue, thequicker thedecay. Determines howquickly thesounddecays tosilenceafterthekeyis quicker thedecay. slightly lowerlevel thanmaximum). The lower thevalue, the Determines howquickly thesoundreachesitssustainlevel(a the keyisplayed. The lower thevalue, thequicker theattack. Determines howquickly after thesoundreachesitsmaximumlevel Level ype parameter explained on page 93. Determineswhether page ype parameter explainedon VIBE his willbedisplayed onlyif VIBE VIBRATE isselectedfortheDSP Key on Key DELAY AT TA KDCYRELEASE DECAY CK SPEED Key Key off DEPTH Time Sustain level Time Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

2. DSP

DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after selecting a category. VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type. Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variation- parameter value setting. ON/OFF The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for all Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). If you select VARIATION ON here, a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the Voice. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the VALUE menu explained below. PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter. VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter.

3. EQ

EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ Using, Creating and Editing Voices bands.

HARMONY Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Select the Right 1 part (page 32, step 1) in the Main display, before you set it. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” on page 87 in step 1.

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices

The instrument features a variety of lush, dynamic organ Voices that you can call up with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. It also gives you the tools to create your own original organ sounds by using the Sound Creator function. Just as on a tradi- tional organ, you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the ﬂute footages.

Basic Procedure

1 Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 32).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 103 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 104 V turning thepoweroff. selecting anotherVoice or settings asaUserVoice before here, makesuretosavethe wish tostorethesettings the settingswillbelost.Ifyou without savingthesettings, If youselectanotherVoice oice Creating(SoundCreator) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION 2 6 5 4 3 tab display.) the EFFECT/EQ (When selecting Pa F AGE) buttontocalluptheVOICESET[ORGANFLUTES]display. In theORGANFLUTESVoice Selectiondisplay, pressthe[6 (page 69). Press the[I](SAVE) button tosaveyoureditedORGANFLUTESVoice V Use the[A]–[D],[F]–[H]and[1 select theparametertobeedited. If youselecttheEFFECT/EQtabdisplay, usethe[A]/[B]buttonsto Use theTAB [ or informationontheavailable parameters, seethefollowing “Editable oice. r ameters inthe VOICE SET[ORGANFLUTES]displays.” 4 √ ][ 5 ® ] buttonstocalluptherelevantsettingdisplay. π π π π † † † † ]–[8 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoeditthe π π π π ] (FOOT- 3 6 Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 103. The Organ Flutes parameters are organized into three different pages. The parameters in each page are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 106), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected.

FOOTAGE, VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters)

ORGAN TYPE Speciﬁes the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage. ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 103), and the Voice Effect DSP (page 103) is turned on (this parameter has the same effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter). VIBRATO ON/OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF.

VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 Using, Creating and Editing Voices (high).

FOOTAGE Footage: 16' ← → 5 1/3' Which footage (16' or 5 1/3') is operated with the [1π†] button can The term “footage” is a reference be switched by pressing the [D] button. to the sound generation of tradi- tional pipe organs, in which the 16'–1' Determines the basic sound of the organ ﬂutes. The longer the pipe, the sound is produced by pipes of lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16' setting determines the low- different lengths (in feet). est pitched component of the Voice, while the 1' setting determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds.

VOLUME/ATTACK

VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. RESP Affects both the attack and release (page 102) portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release. VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above. MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the ﬁrst notes played and held simultaneously; while the ﬁrst notes are held, any subse- quently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. 4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume. LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 105 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 106 V oice Creating(SoundCreator) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual page 102. Same parameters asinthe VOICE SET“EFFECT/EQ”tabdisplay explainedon EFFECT/EQ 1 Y below). effect, settheHARMONY/ECHOparameter toOFF(inthedisplay explained F below. disable thisfeatureby theoperation intherelevant display asexplained automatically calledupwhen a Voice isselected.However, you canalso V Each Voice islinkedtoitsrelatedparameter settingsthatareindicatedinthe Disabling automaticselectionofVoice Sets(effects,etc.) 3 2 or example,ifyou want tochange the Voice yet keepthesameHarmony ou cansettheseindependentlyby keyboardpartandparameter group. OICE SETdisplays, includingeffectsandEQ. Usuallythesesettingsare [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. parameter group. Refer totheseparate DataListforalistofparameters containedineach group. up ofthesettings(ONorOFF)independentlyforeachparameter Use the[4 Use the[A]/[B]buttonstoselectakeyboardpart. V OICE SET π π π π † † † † → ]–[8 [E]REGIST.SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoenable/disableautomaticcalling → T AB [ ® ] Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 107 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s → ] buttons to select a ﬁngering. † † † † π π π π ]–[3 [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING

hese Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing hese Styles provide even by hese special Styles provide play- piano-only accompaniment. Just by hese Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined and exciting arrangements professional hese Styles provide hord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed have These with the Main sections. hord changes, result in inappropriate or unex- may an on-bass chord hord, or playing hords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmo- changes chord As a result, your hords of the player. † † † † → T as well as special riffs with mixing in original chord types and changes, c to add “spice” and a professional touch performances of certain to your that the Styles may however, songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all In some cases for example, playing a songs and for all chord playing. simple major triad for a country song may seventh result in a “jazzy” c pected accompaniment. T add left hand, you can automatically ing the proper chords with your and bass/chordcomplicated, professional-sounding arpeggios patterns. T the resulting accompaniment exactly follows The with perfect playability. c accompaniment. into lifelike musical nies are instantly transformed π π π π ] CHORD FINGERING ® attern Variation ...... page 47 P Chords for Style Playback (Indicate) to Play Learning How ...... 49 page for the Selected Style Settings Appropriate Panel Setting)Touch ...... (One page 50 AB [ Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] Press the [1 T Reference to Quick Guide pages to Quick Guide Reference Playing “Mary Lamb” with the Auto Had a Little FeatureAccompaniment ...... page 45 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Accompaniment Auto the Editing and Creating Using, he Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style the above are indicated defining characteristics he Style type and its Pianist Session Pro 2 1 Selecting a Chord Fingering Type section of the in the chord play you the chords can be controlled by Style playback of fingerings. types are seven There keyboard. T name. Style Characteristics Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 108 Playing OnlytheRhythmChannelsofaStyle turned on. sure that ACMP ON/OFFis any ofthese Styles,always make Styles). When you want to use the PianistStyles(orothersimilar T the [SYNCSTART] button). if SyncStartisenabled(turnon simply by playing thekeyboard, Y Start Starting therhythmwithSync Artificial Intelligence AI: ou canalsostarttherhythm he rhythm doesnotsoundfor CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual of aStyle Playing OnlytheRhythm Channels 4 3 2 1 however, thatnot allStylescontainrhythm channels. with justtherhythm. You can sounddifferentrhythms foreach Style.Keep inmind, Rhythm isoneofthemostimportantpartsaStyle. Try toplay themelody along AI FULLKEYBOARD AI FINGERED FULL KEYBOARD FINGERED MULTI FINGER SINGLE FINGER BASS FINGERED ON Press theSTYLE CONTROL[START/STOP] buttontostopthe rhythm. rhythm channels. Press theSTYLECONTROL [START/STOP] button toplaybackthe Press the[ACMPON/OFF] toturnAutoAccompanimentoff. Select aStyle(page45). w Lets you your finger ownchords ontheChordsectionofkeyboard, booklet andcanbelookedupusingtheChordTutor49). function(page DataList ognizes thevariouschord typeswhich arelistedontheseparate and chord accompanimentintheselectedStyle. The Fingered typerec- Style playback. 11th and13thchordscannotbeplayed. This typeisavailable onlyfor indicate thechords (basedonthepreviouslyplayed chord, etc.).9th, K may notbesuitableforusewiththisfeature. This typeissimilartoFull with many songs,somearrangements board typeisdesignedtowork to worry aboutspecifyingtheStylechords. Although the AI FullKey- anything, anywhere onthekeyboardusingbothhands. You don’t have you playmatically createappropriateaccompanimentwhile justabout When thisadvanced typeisengaged,theinstrumentwillauto- fingering played chord, etc.). notes canbeplayed toindicatethechords(basedonpreviously Basically thesameasFingered,withexceptionthatlessthanthree melody notewithyour right. c right hands—forexample,playingabassnotewithyourlefthandand similar toFingered, evenifyou leftand splitthenotesbetweenyour Detects chords Chordsaredetectedinaway intheentirekeyrange. c y in theChordsectionofkeyboardisusedasbassnote,allowing astheFingered,butlowestnoteplayedAccepts thesamefingerings withouthaving toswitchcan useeithertypeoffingering fingeringtypes. A used: gerings describedatrightare T only forStyleplayback. board. This typeisavailable of thekey- Chord section mum numberofkeysonthe c minor andminor-seventh ment usingmajor, seventh, orchestrated accompani- Makes itsimpletoproduce hord withyour right,orby playing achord withyour lefthandanda hord isalways usedasthebassnote). ou toplay “onbass”chords (intheFingered modetherootof hords by pressing amini- he abbreviatedchordfin- eyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to eyboard, withtheexceptionthatlessthanthreenotescanbeplayed utomatically detects Single Finger orFingeredutomatically detectsSingleFinger chord soyou fingerings, hile the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, hile theinstrumentsuppliesappropriatelyorchestrated Cm C Cm C 7 7 both awhiteandblackkeytoitslef simultaneously presstherootkeya For aminor-seventhchord, key andawhitetoitsleft. simultaneously presstheroot For aseventhchord, key andablacktoitsleft. simultaneously presstheroot For aminorchord, press therootkeyonly. For amajorchord,

t Style Playback-related Settings

Turning channels of the Style on/off A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2). You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/ OFF display. When the STYLE tab is not selected, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again.

2 Press the [1†]–[8†] buttons to turn the channels on or off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback) You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the Style, by setting [ACMP ON/OFF] to on, and [SYNC START] to off. For example, if MULTI FINGER is selected (page 108), you can perform with your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one ﬁnger.

Setting the fade in/out time You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (page 137).

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/OUT/ HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters by using the [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum. FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum. FADE OUT HOLD Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade TIME out.

Style Playback-related Settings The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions, which can be accessed in the display , see page 110.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√] STYLE SETTING

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 109 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 110 Style Playback-relatedSettings to “OFF”or“FIXED.” data willberecordedwhen set to “STYLE,” andonlythechord data willberecordedwhen set that issoundedandthechord Please notethatboththe Voice recording aSong Data thatisrecordedwhen CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual • • • 2 • • ume changes inresponsetoyour playing strengthinthechord sectionofthekeyboard. T release thekeyssoonerthantimesethere,Synchro Stopfunctionworks. to normal,lettingyou releasethekeysandstillhave theStyleplay. Inotherwords, ifyou a chord forlongerthanthetimesethere. This conveniently resetsStyleplayback control v automatically cancelled. When the[SYNCSTOP] buttonisturnedonandthissettoa T Synchro StopWindow Next Bar Real Time [D] change. (The [OTS LINK]button mustbeon.) timing inwhich theOne Touch Settingschange withtheMAIN VARIATION [A]– T OTS LinkTiming FIXED STYLE OFF c F ﬁngerings arerecognizedandthechord root/typeareshown inthedisplay. paniment chord. Inthiscondition—called“Stop Accompaniment”—any valid chord in thechord sectionofthekeyboardwithStylestopped,and stillheartheaccom- When [ACMP ON/OFF]isturnedonand[SYNCSTART] isoff,you canplay chords Stop Accompaniment the selectedStyle,MAINC will becalledup. section isautomaticallyselected. For example,when MAINDis not containedin When any oftheMAIN A-D sectionsisnot included intheStyledata,nearest is stopped,theactive section ismaintainedeven ifthedifferentStyleisselected. ent Styles(when Style playback isstopped). When setto“OFF” andStyleplayback Determines thedefaultsectionthatisautomaticallycalled upwhen selecting differ- Style Touch Section Set T Style ChangeBehavior urns touch responsefortheStyleplayback on/off. When thisissetto“ON,” theStylevol- alue otherthan“OFF,” thisautomaticallycancelstheSynchro Stopfunctionifyou hold rom thedisplay above, you candeterminewhether thechord played inthe hord sectionwillsoundornotintheStop Accompaniment status. his determineshow longyou canholdachord beforetheSynchro Stopfunctionis his appliestotheOTS Linkfunction(page51). This parameter determinesthe here arethreetypesasshown below...... The chord played inthechord sectionwillnotsound. Use the[1 ...... The chord played in thechord sectionwillsoundviathe ...... The chord played in thechord sectionwillsoundviathe ...... One ...... One Touch Settingiscalledupatthenextmeasure,after ...... One ...... One Touch Settingisimmediatelycalledupwhen you π π π π † † † † ]–[8 y press aMAIN VARIATION button. speciﬁed Voice, regardlessoftheselectedStyle. V π π π π ou pressaMAIN VARIATION button. oices oftheselectedStyle. † † † † ] buttonsforeachsetting. Split Point Settings

Tempo This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback. HOLD ...... The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained. RESET...... The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. Part On/Off This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback. HOLD ...... The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained. RESET...... All Style Channels are set to On.

Split Point Settings These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sections of the keyboard: the Chord section, the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1 and 2 section. The two Split Point settings (below) are speciﬁed as note names.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING → TAB [√][®] SPLIT POINT Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

2 Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point (see below).

• Split Point (S)—separates the Chord section for Style playback from the section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT) • Split Point (L)—separates the two sections for playing Voices, LEFT and RIGHT 1– 2. These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different notes as desired. Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note Split Point (S+L)

Chord section + Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Voice LEFT Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes Split Point (L) Specifying the Split Point by Split Point (S) note name Press the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons. You can specify the Split Point of the Voice and chord sec- Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Voice LEFT tion of the keyboard by using Chord section STYLE in the display, and you can Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. specify the Split Point of the left Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S), and Split Point (S) cannot be and right Voices by using LEFT. set higher than Split Point (L).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 111 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 112 Editing theVolume andTonal BalanceoftheStyle(MIXINGCONSOLE) (CLEAR) button. w To Clear thesearch criteria ord/Style, pressthe[F]/[G]/[H] CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual cleartheenteredMusic/Key- PA (parameters) intheMIXINGCONSOLEdisplay” on page 90.)Callupthe“STYLE Y ance oftheStyle(MIXINGCONSOLE) Editing theVolume andTonal Bal- 3 2 1 tion oftheMusicFinder. You canalsosave your favorite recordsintheFAVORITE display. Y Searching theRecords play. The recordsoftheMusicFinder canbesearched andedited. settings (for Voices, Styles,etc.)thatmatch thesongortypeofmusicyou want to 52) isaconvenientMusic Finder featurethatcallsuppre-programmed (page panel Convenient MusicFinderfeature V 4 ou cansearch therecordsby specifyingasongnameorkeyword, usingtheSearch func- ou cansetvarious mixing-relatedparameters oftheStyle.(See“Adjustable items oice Combination(MIXINGCONSOLE)”on page 88,andfollow theinstructions. R T” display instep#3oftheBasicProcedure“Editing Volume Balanceand Enter thesearch criteria. Press the[6 T Press theTAB [ Press the[MUSICFINDER]buttontocallupMUSICFINDERdisplay. he ALL tabdisplay containsthepresetRecords. π π π π ] (SEARCH1)buttontocalluptheSearch display. √ ] buttontoselecttheALLtab. Convenient Music Finder feature

• Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword 1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B] (KEYWORD) button to call up the character entry display. Entering several different keywords 2 Enter the song title or music genre, or the keyword (page 73). You can search several different keywords simultaneously by • Search by Style name inserting a separator (comma) between each. 1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display. 2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display.

• Adding other Search Criteria You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style name. BEAT ...... Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your performance by pressing the [D] button. All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY. SEARCH AREA ...... Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing the [E] button. (These correspond to the tabs at the top of the Music Finder display.) TEMPO...... Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your performance by using the [1π†]/[2π†] (TEMPO) buttons. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles GENRE ...... Select the desired music genre by using the [5π†]/ [6π†] (GENRE) buttons.

5 Press the [8π] (START SEARCH) button to start the search. The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. To cancel searching, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button.

Searching other music genres When you want to search other music genres, press the [6†] (SEARCH 2) button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display.

Calling up the panel settings to match the style (REPERTOIRE) When searching by style name, the same search result is obtained even if the search is done by using the Repertoire function. See page 53 for details.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 113 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 114 Convenient MusicFinderfeature (see step5,page115). edited recordasanew the nameandregister preset, makesuretochange you wanttokeeptheoriginal record tocreateanewone.If Y ou canalsochangeapreset CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION call upthoseStylesandsettingsyou usemostofteninyour performance. records, you may want tocreatea“folder”offavorite records—soyou canquickly As convenient astheSearch functionisinplumbingthedepthsofMusicFinder Creating aSetofFavoriteRecords 2 1 created recordsareautomaticallysaved intheinternalmemory. Y Editing Records 2 1 Deleting RecordsfromtheFAVORITE Display 3 2 1 ou cancreateanewrecordby editingthecurrentlyselectedrecord. The newly check toseeiftherecordhasbeenadded. Press the[8 Select thedesiredrecordtobeeditedinMusicFinderdisplay. Press the[H](DELETEFROMFAVORITE) button. Select therecordyouwanttodeletefromFAVORITE display. Call uptheFAVORITE displaybyusingtheTAB [ to theFAVORITE display. Press the[H](ADDTOFAVORITE) buttontoaddtheselectedrecord Select thedesiredrecordfromMusicFinderdisplay. π π π π † † † † ] (RECORDEDIT)buttontocalluptheEditdisplay. √ ][ ® ] buttons,and Convenient Music Finder feature

3 Edit the record as desired. • Editing the song name/keyword/Style name Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 113).

• Changing the Tempo Press the [1π†] (TEMPO) button.

• Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending) Use the [2π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section.

• Editing the Genre Keep in mind that the Beat set- Select the desired genre by using the [5π†]/[6π†] (GENRE) buttons. When ting made here is only for the creating a new genre, press the [7π†] (GENRE NAME) button and input the Music Finder search function; genre name. (page 73) this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself. • Deleting the Currently Selected Record Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button.

• Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display, press the [E] (FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE.

5 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below.

• Creating a new record The maximum number of Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If records is 2500, including inter- you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above, the record is nal records. added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display.

• Overwriting an existing record Press the [8π] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above, the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten.

Saving the Record

The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and addi- tionally created records as a single ﬁle. Keep in mind that individual records (panel setups) cannot be handled as separate ﬁles.

1 Call up the Save display. [MUSIC FINDER]→ TAB[√][®]ALL→ [7π†] (FILES)

2 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/ USB).

3 Press the [6†] button to save the ﬁle (page 69). All records are saved together as a single ﬁle.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 115 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 116 Convenient MusicFinderfeature tory resettings(page74). Music Finder toitsoriginalfac- Y Data Restoring theMusicFinder •M • ou canrestoretheinstrument’s Selecting "REPLACE"auto- (page 117)andexecuted. loaded fromtheweb Music Finderisdown- delete allrecordsofthe hand, whentheﬁleto to anotherlocationbefore- tant datahasbeenarchived hand. to anotherlocationbefore- tant datahasbeenarchived Make surethatallimpor- nal memory. original recordsfrominter- matically deletesallyour CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION ake surethatallimpor- 4 3 2 1 instructions below. To Calling upMusicFinderRecordsSavedtoUSER/USB

call uptheMusicFinder recordsyou’ve saved toUSER/USB, follow the • • is chosen, andthedesiredbuttonispressed. T Press the[A]–[J]buttonstoselectdesiredMusicFinderfile. Use theTAB [ the MusicFinder. Press the[7 [MUSIC FINDER] Call upthe[MUSICFINDER]display. he messageisdisplayed accordingtothecontentoffilewhen thefile to abortthisoperation. Execute theoperation tocalluptheMusicFinder file.Select“CANCEL” T APPEND replaced withtherecordsofselectedfile. All MusicFinder recordscurrentlyintheinstrumentaredeletedand REPLACE he recordscalledupareadded. 4 π π π π √ † † † † ][ ] (FILES)buttontoopentheFileselectiondisplayof → ® T ] buttonstoselectUSER/USB. AB [ √ ][ ® ] ALL 2 4 3 Style Creator

Viewing information about Music Finder records The available contents of the ser- Information on the record about which you like in Music Finder is called, vice described at left are subject and the song of the model is downloaded, or it is possible to add it to to change. musical instruments by downloading the Music Finder record which you like. For more details about this service, refer to the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/idc

1 Make sure that you’re connected to the Internet (page 179), press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Use the [1π†]–[5π†] buttons in the display to select the record for which you want to view information on the Web. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to make a selection. After using the dial to make a selection, press [ENTER]. 3 Press the [J] (MUSIC FINDER +) button to open the Web page.

3 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 4

4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the browser screen and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.

Style Creator You can create your own Styles—recording them by yourself or by combining the internal Style data. The created Styles can be edited.

Style Structure

Styles are made up of ﬁfteen different sections and each section has eight separate channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

Style Section

Four different Fill-ins are available.

Channel

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 117 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 118 Style Creator CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual the “Cool8Beat”Style—combiningvarious elementstocreateoneStyle. use thebasspatternfrom“60’s Rock1” Styleandimportthechord patternsfrom original 8-beatStyle,you couldtakerhythm patternsfromthe“70’s 8Beat”Style, terns fromtheinternalpresetStyles.For example, ifyou want tocreateyour own T ■ since you canentereach event manually. T each noteorindividually, andspecifyitslength. T ■ Style fromscratch. to createandthenre-recordpartsoftheStyleasdesired,oryou cancreateanew select aninternalStylethatmostcloselymatches your imageoftheStyleyou want T ■ T Y Creating aStyle • • Realtime RecordingCharacteristics time recording. Create asingleStyleby recordingtheindividual channels one-by-one, usingreal- Realtime Recording(BASIC) ou canuseoneofthethreedifferentmethodsdescribedbelow tocreateaStyle. his convenient featureletsyou createcompositeStylesby combiningvarious pat- his allows you tocreateaStylewithouthaving toplay thepartsoninstrument, his methodislikewritingmusicnotationonpaper, sinceitallows you toenter his methodletsyou recordtheStyleby simplyplaying theinstrument. You can he createdStylescanalsobeedited(page123). delete theoriginal databeforerecording. applied onlyto therhythm channels. For allother channels (except rhythm), When creatingaStylebased onanexistinginternalStyle,overdub recordingis w play back fromthenext repetition, lettingyou overdub newmaterialtotheloop section, thetwo measuresarerepeatedmany times.Notesthatyou recordwill 120). ForDelete (page example,ifyou startrecordingwithatwo-measure MAIN not deleted,exceptwhen usingfunctionssuch asRhythm Clear(page120)and data, withoutdeletingtheoriginaldata.InStylerecording, therecordeddatais T Overdub Recording w that you recordwillplay back fromthenext repetition(loop),lettingyou record a two-measure mainsection,thetwo measuresarerepeatedlyrecorded.Notes Style recordingisalsodoneusingloops.For example,ifyou startrecordingwith Style playback repeatstherhythm patternsofseveral measuresina“loop,” and Loop Recording Style Assembly Step Recording Realtime Recording his methodrecordsnewmaterialtoachannel already containing recorded hile hearingpreviouslyrecorded material. hile hearingpreviouslyrecordedmaterial. 60’s Rock1 Phrase 2 Phrase 1 Pad Chord 2 Chord 1 Bass Rhythm 2 Rhythm 1 ➤ ➤ Seepage122 Seepage121 ➤ Seebelow 0s8etCool8Beat 70's 8Beat Phrase 2 Phrase 1 Pad Chord 2 Chord 1 Bass Rhythm 2 Rhythm 1 Phrase 2 Phrase 1 Pad Chord 2 Chord 1 Bass Rhythm 2 Rhythm 1 Phrase 2 Phrase 1 Pad Chord 2 Chord 1 Bass Rhythm 2 Rhythm 1 Style Creator

When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles:

Overdub recording possible. Overdub recording not possible. Delete the data before recording.

Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing 1 When recording channels BASS- (page 45). PHR2 based on an internal Style, When creating a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button delete the original data before from the display shown in step 5 below. recording. Overdub recording is not possible on channels BASS- PHR2 (see page 118). 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

When the RECORD display (chan- 3 Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display. nel indication) at the lower part of the STYLE CREATOR display dis- 4 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons, then select the BASIC tab to call up the appears, you can press the [F] RECORD display. (REC CH) button to re-display it. Muting speciﬁc channels dur- 5 Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT] ing recording Turn off the desired channels by button. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles pressing the [1†]–[8†] buttons. 6 Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section (page 117) to be recorded. Specifying sections from the panel buttons You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[END- ING], etc) on the panel. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display. Change the sections by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and 7-2 execute the selection by pressing the [8π] button.

The INTRO 4/ENDING 4 sections cannot be speciﬁed with the panel controls.

6 7-1

7 Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the selected section. Actually enter the speciﬁed length for the selected section by pressing the [D] (EXECUTE) button.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 119 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 120 Style Creator operation (page69). without executingtheSave or youturnthepoweroff if youchangetoanotherStyle The recordedStylewillbelost and presstheappropriatekey. recorded channels areshown) ton (fromthedisplay where the down the[E](RHYCLEAR)but- sound, simultaneouslyhold To channel (RHY1,2) Deleting therecordedrhythm • • • V Limits ontherecordable oices tion Voice Drum/SFX kits,andS. Articula Any exceptOrganFlute Voice, BASS–PHR2 channels: Only drum/SFXkits RHY2 channel: S. Articulation Voice Any exceptOrganFlute Voice/ RHY1 channel: CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual deleteaspecificinstrument CAUTION - 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 15 and selectthedesiredVoice forthecorrespondingrecordingchannels. To ton, [1 the [F](RECCH)buttonandpressingappropriatenumberedbut- Specify thechanneltoberecordedbysimultaneouslyholdingdown Save thedatainStyleSelectiondisplay (page69). save yourdata. Press the[I](SAVE) button tocalluptheStyleSelectiondisplay button. Call upthedisplayforselectingsections,etc.bypressing[EXIT] Stop recordingbypressingtheStyleControl[START/STOP] button. button tospecifythechannel,thenplaykeyboard. down the[F](RECCH)buttonandpressappropriate[1 To section “Ruleswhen recordingnon-rhythm channels” (seebelow). recording tochannels otherthantherhythm channels (RHY1,2),refertothe one, listeningtotheprevioussoundsastheyplay. For informationon plays back repeatedlyinaloop,you canrecordindividual soundsoneby Playback ofthespecifiedsectionstarts.Sinceaccompanimentpattern Start recordingbypressingtheStyleControl[START/STOP] button. before releasingyour fingerfromthe[J]button. Y ton andpresstheappropriatenumberedbutton,[1 To Press the[EXIT]buttontoreturnpreviousdisplay. Call uptheVoice Selectiondisplaybyusingthe[1 again. ou cancancelthedeletionby pressingthesamenumberedbuttonagain,

continuerecordingwithanotherchannel,simultaneouslyhold deleteachannel,simultaneouslyholddownthe[J](DELETE)but- cancel theselection,pressappropriatenumberedbutton[1 † † † † 8 9 ]–[8 † † † † ]. π π π π π π π π ]–[8 ]–[8 π π π π 10 8 π π π π ] † † † † † buttons ]. ]–[8 ]–[8 † † † † † ] ] Style Creator

Rules when recording non-rhythm channels • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).

C = Chord notes Any desired chord or chord pro- C, R = Recommended notes gression can be used for the CRC CRC INTRO and ENDING sections. Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your per- Changing the Source Chord formance. The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the If you want to record the pattern Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above). with a Source Chord other than You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER dis- CM7, set the PLAY ROOT and play on page 127. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from PLAY CHORD parameters on the PARAMETER page (page 127) the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will before recording. also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 128.

Step Recording (EDIT) The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Recording” (page 119).

In the EDIT display, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 147), with the exception of the points listed below: • In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically ﬁxed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 121 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 122 Style Creator operation (page69). without executingtheSave or youturnthepoweroff if youchangetoanotherStyle The recordedStylewillbelost the paneloperation. INTRO 4/ENDING4directlyvia Y ou cannotselecttheSECTION CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • • 3 2 1 (channels) fromexistinginternalStyles. Style Assembly allows you tocreateasingleStyleby mixingthevarious patterns Style Assembly(ASSEMBLY) 7 6 5 4 in theBASIC tabdisplay. ever, theycannotbechanged intheStyleCreator. Selecttherecordingchannel Recording channels canbechanged intheSongCreator1–16tabdisplay; how- [F] button.However, Chord,Lyrics, andSystemExclusive datacannotbeentered. be edited(delete,copy, ormove). You canswitch betweenthetwo by pressingthe In theStyleCreator, thechannel datacanbeenteredandSystemExclusive datacan pressing the[8 save yourdatafromthedisplay (page69). Press the[J](SAVE) button tocalluptheStyleSelectiondisplay, and Repeat steps3–5abovetoreplacethepatternsof otherchannels. using the[4 Select thedesiredchannelforsection(chosen instep4above)by 3 above)byusingthe[2 Select thedesiredsectionofnewlyimportedStyle (choseninstep To tern youwanttoreplaceintheStyleSelectiondisplay. pressing thesamebuttonagain.SelectStylecontainingpat- the [A]–[D]and[F]–[I]buttons.CallupStyleSelectiondisplayby Select thechannelforwhichyouwishtoreplacepatternbyusing desired by usingthe[6 ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.)onthepanel.Changesectionas Call uptheSECTIONdisplay by pressingoneoftheSectionbuttons Select thedesiredsection(Intro,Main,Ending,etc.)foryournewStyle. (page 119).Instep4,selectthe ASSEMBLY tab. T Select thebasicStyle,thencallupdisplayforStyleAssembly. he operation stepsarethesameas1–4in“Realtimerecording” returntothepreviousscreen,press[EXIT]buttonafter selectingtheStyle. π π π π π † † † † ] (OK)button. ]/[5 π π π π π† † † † † π π π π ] (CHANNEL)buttons. ]/[7 that make upthesection. Indicates thechannels † † † † π† ]/[3 π π π π ] buttonsandexecutetheoperation by † † † † ] (SECTION)buttons. Section display Style Creator

Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select the method of playback. Use the [6π†]/[7π†] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously. • ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any channels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously. • OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display.

Editing the Created Style

You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording, Step recording Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles and/or Style Assembly.

Basic Operation for Editing Styles

1 Select a Style to be edited. Select the file to which the 2 Call up the operation display. data is saved. → You can also select the specified [FUNCTION] [F] DIGITAL REC MENU file to which the data is to be saved by pressing the [USB]/ 3 Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button. [USER] buttons. [USB]/[USER] → [B] STYLE → [A]–[J] 4 Press the TAB[√][®] button to select a tab. • Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 124 These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created Style. • Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 126 The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize settings for each channel in the Style data. • Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 127 For playback of your created Style, you can decide how notes will be converted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the chord section of the keyboard.

5 Edit the selected Style.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 123 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 124 Style Creator operation (page69). without executingtheSave or youturnthepoweroff you changetoanotherStyle The editedStylewillbelostif CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION 1 Operation forEditingStyles”(page123). T Changing theRhythmicFeel(GROOVE) 4 3 2 he explanationhereapplieswhen you selecttheGROOVE tabinstep4of“Basic 3 1 F Press the[A]/[B]buttontoselecteditmenu(page125). Save thedatainStyleSelectiondisplay (page69). save yourdata. Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocalluptheStyleSelectiondisplay one level; onlythepreviousoperation canbeundone. satisﬁed withtheGroove orDynamicsresults. The Undofunctiononlyhas ton changes to“UNDO,” lettingyou restoretheoriginaldataifyou’re not After theoperation iscompleted,you canexecutetheeditionandthisbut- display. Press the[D](EXECUTE)buttontoactuallyentereditsforeach Use the[1 or detailsoneditableparameters, seepage125. π π π π 2 † † † † ]–[8 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoeditthedata. 4 Style Creator

■ GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style.

ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat—but not including the first beat—will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

■ DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected Style.

CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied—in other words, which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 125 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 126 Style Creator operation. without executingthesave or youturnthepoweroff you changetoanotherStyle The editedStylewillbelostif CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION 1 “Basic Operation forEditingStyles”(page123). T Editing DataforEachChannel(CHANNEL) 5 4 3 2 REMOVE EVENT BAR CLEAR BAR COPY CHANGE VELOCITY QUANTIZE he explanationhereapplieswhen you selecttheCHANNELtabinstep4of 1 4 F T be edited. Press the[A]/[B]buttontoselecteditmenu(seebelow). Save thedatainStyleSelectiondisplay (page69). save yourdata. Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocalluptheStyleSelectiondisplay only thepreviousoperation canbeundone. satisfied withtheresultsofedit. The Undofunctiononlyhasonelevel; ton changes to[UNDO],lettingyou restoretheoriginaldataifyou’re not After theoperation iscompleted,you canexecutetheeditionandthisbut- display. Press the[D](EXECUTE)buttontoactuallyentereditsforeach Use the[4 Use the[1 or detailsoneditableparameters, seebelow. he selectedchannel isshown attheupperleftofdisplay. π π π π π π π π 23 † † † † † † † † T the selectedchannel. T w measureofthedestinationlocation,to thefirst copied. DESTspecifies (TOP) thefirst specifies andlast(LAST)measuresintheregiontobe channel. SOURCE measures toanotherlocationwithinthespecified T here. ing tothepercentagespecified channel, accord- Boosts orcutsthevelocityofallnotesinspecified additional available parameters below. 161), withtheexceptionoftwo Same asintheSongCreator(page his functionletsyouremove events specific from theselectedchannel. range ofmeasureswithin his functionclearsalldatafromthespecified his functionallowsdatatobecopiedfromonemeasureorgroup of C hich thedataistobecopied. C ]/[2 ]–[8 Sixteenth noteswithswing Eighth noteswithswing π π π π π π π π † † † † † † † † ] (CHANNEL)buttonstoselectthechannel ] buttonstoeditthedata. 5 Style Creator

Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto Editing of Style File Format data Source Pattern accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single is related only to note conver- SOURCE ROOT uniﬁed format. By using the Style Creator, you can take sion. Editing the rhythm chan- (Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern) advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create nels has no effect. SOURCE CHORD your own Styles. (Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern) The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm Chord change via the track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator chord section of the feature. keyboard. • Source Pattern Note Transposition There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback NTR notes, depending on the particular root note and chord (Note Transposition Rule applied to the type that are selected. The Style data is appropriately con- Chord Root change) verted depending on the chord changes you make during NTT your performance. This basic Style data that you create (Note Transposition Table applied to the with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pat- Chord Type change) tern.” • Note Transposition This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be con- Other Settings verted in response to chord changes. HIGH KEY Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles (Upper limit of the octaves of the note • Other Settings transposing caused by the Chord Root Using the parameters of this group, you can ﬁne-tune how change) Style playback responds to the chords you play. For exam- NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the ple, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the note is sounded) Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shift- RTR ing the pitch to an authentic range—ensuring that no (Retrigger Rules that determine how notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instru- notes held through chord changes will be ment (e.g., very low notes of a piccolo sound). handled)

Output

The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 123).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 128).

1 4

2 3

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 127 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 128 Style Creator tings. parameters tothedesiredset- “Play Root”and“Play Chord” c and NTTBASS to“OFF”then “Root Fixed,” NTTto“Bypass,” and root. To dothis,setNTRto hear itplayed by aspeciﬁc chord tern. However, thereisaway to in-process withtheSource Pat- y Normally intheStyleCreator, Speciﬁc Chord Auditioning Your Stylewitha operation. without executingtheSave or youturnthepoweroff you changetoanotherStyle The editedStylewillbelostif hange thenewlydisplayed ou canhearyour originalStyle- CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION 3 2 4 from theSource Pattern inresponsetochord changes. T ■ When theSource RootisC: depending onthenewlyselectedchord type. CM7 toanotherchord, thechord notesandrecommendedwillalsochange, included inthepresetdata. When you change Source Root/Chordfromthedefault deleted priortorecordinganewStyle,regardlessoftheSource RootandChord and aSource Type of“M7”),isautomaticallyselectedwhenever thepresetdatais w T ■ ROOT FIXED (Root Transpose) ROOT TRANS his determinestherelative positionoftherootnoteinchord, when converted hese settingsdeterminetheoriginalkeyofsource pattern(i.e.,thekeyused C =ChordnotesC, R=Recommendednotes Cm CM aug CM CM Caug C hen recordingthepattern). The defaultsettingofCM7(withaSource Rootof“C” CRC R C CRC CRC RC CR R CR CRC 7 NTR (NoteTransposition Rule) SOURCE ROOT/CHORD

b 7 7 5 CC (11) R C F Use the[3 T be edited. Use the[1 Save thedatainStyleSelectiondisplay (page69). save yourdata. Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocalluptheStyleSelectiondisplay RCR CC or detailsoneditableparameters, seebelow. he selectedchannel isshown attheupperleftofdisplay. C R CmM Cm C aug C CM C C C CCC RCC C CR R R C CRC RC CR CRC 7 7 (9) 6 C C 7 π π π π π π π π R R RCC † † † † † † † † C c are transposed toF. Usethissetting for C becomeC3,F3and A3 when they the notesC3,E3andG3inkey of the previousnoterange.For example, T nels thatcontainmelodylines. posed toF. Use thissettingforchan- F3, A3 andC4when theyaretrans- C3, E3andG3inthekeyofCbecome maintained. For example,thenotes pitch relationshipbetweennotesis the When therootnoteistransposed, C hannels thatcontainchordparts. he noteiskeptasclosepossibleto ]/[2 ]–[8 Cm CmM C C CM R CR CRC R C C CRC CR C RC CC RCC CR C 1+8 7 ( 6 7 # 11 π π π π C π π C π π 7 (9) ) R † † † † † † † † CC R ] (CHANNEL)buttonstoselectthechannel ] buttonstoeditthedata. CM C Cm C Cdim R CC CRC R C C CRC CR CC CC 7 1+5 (13) 7 7 ( # CCR CC 11) R C R C C CM Cm Cdim Csus CCC RC CR CR C CR CCC RRR R CR 7 CC RR ( 7 add9 b 9) b CCC CCR 4 7 5 C C major chord. When playing aC C majorchord. When playing a C Csus C CM Cm CCC C CR CCR CCC C C C CCC CRC CC 7 7 RCC ( 7 b (9) (9) 13 2 C ) R R C major chord. When playing anF F majorchord. When playing an C C sus Cm C C R C CCC CC CRC CC CCC 7 6 7 (9) ( 7 # 9) (9) CC CC 4 C R C C Style Creator

■ NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern.

BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the root note. MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. CHORD Suitable for chord transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. MELODIC MINOR In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and 5th diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern. HARMONIC When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this MINOR table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and ﬂatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.

HARMONIC In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles MINOR 5th diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third, flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. NATURAL MINOR In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and 5th diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

■ NTT BASS ON/OFF The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument.

■ HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR parameter (page 128) is set to “Root Trans.” Example—When the highest key is F. Root changes CM C#M FM F#M Notes played C3-E3-G3 C#3-F3-G#3 F3-A3-C4 F#2-A#2-C#3

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 129 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 130 Style Creator CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual pitch inresponsetochord changes. T ■ sound areautomaticallyshiftedtothesetrange. sounded (e.g.,highbasssoundsorlow piccolosounds). The actualnotesthat as realisticpossible—inotherwords, thatnonotesoutsidethenatural range are c T ■ ROOT RETRIGGER TO RETRIGGER ROOT PITCH SHIFTTO PITCH SHIFT STOP hannels. Byjudicioussettingofthisrange, you canensurethatthevoices sound hese settingsdeterminewhether notesstopsoundingornotandhow theychange his setsthenoterange (highestandlowest notes)forvoices recordedtothestyle RTR (RetriggerRule) NOTE LIMIT Example—When thelowest noteisC3andthehighestD4. Notes played Root changes c T to thenextchord. T of thenewchord. T of thenewchord. T T hord. However, theoctave ofthenewnoteremainssame. he note is retriggered with a new attack attherootnoteofnext he noteisretriggeredwithanewattack atanewpitchcorresponding he noteisretriggeredwithanewattack tomatchhe pitch theroot ofthenotewillbendwithoutanewattack tomatchhe pitch thetype ofthenotewillbendwithoutanewattack he notesstopsounding. E3-G3-C4 CM F3-G C # # 3-C M # 4 F3-A3-C4 FM Low Limit High Limit Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups—Registration Memory

The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Reg- istration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (ﬁle).

Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups

Registering Custom Panel Setups

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as desired. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the Registration Memory function.

2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button. The display for selecting the items to be registered appears. Only the items selected here will be registered. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

2 5

3 4

3 Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button. When recalling registration setups, you can also select the items to be recalled or not, even 4 Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine if you selected all items when whether the item should be registered or not, by pressing the registering (page 133). [8π†] button.

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register 5 About the lamp status: your settings. Off...... no data registered It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or On (green)...data registered, but green. Buttons that are lit in red or green, already contain the panel setup not currently selected data. Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION On (red)...... data registered, and currently selected MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings. Deleting an unneeded panel setup 6 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps #1– See page 133. #5. Deleting all eight current panel setups To delete all the eight current panel setups, turn the [POWER] button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 131 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

Saving the Registered Panel Setups You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.

Bank 4 Bank 3 Bank 2 Bank 1

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press the [6†] button to save the Bank file (page 69). Registration Memory data compatibility In general, Registration Memory data (Bank files) is compatible among the models CVP-409/ 407/405/403/401. However, the data may not be perfectly compatible, depending on the specifications of each model. 1 2

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but- About recalling setups from a tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. USB storage device When recalling the setups including Song/Style ﬁle selection from a USB storage device, make sure that the appropriate USB storage device including the registered Song/Style is connected into the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal. 2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registering and Recalling Custom Panel

223

3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registra- tion Memory section.

Parameter Lock You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls—in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, Song or incoming MIDI data, etc. Call up the Parameter Lock display ([FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 3 PARAMETER LOCK). Select the desired parameter by using the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons, then lock it with the [8π] button.

132 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Panel Setup

The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited. 3 Press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Dis- play.

4 Edit the panel setups. • Deleting a panel setup Press the [5†] button to delete a panel setup (page 71). • Renaming a panel setup Press the [1†] button to rename a panel setup (page 72).

The number above the ﬁle name corresponds to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

5 Press the [8π] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

Disabling Recall of Speciﬁc Items (Freeze Func- tion)

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Regis- tration Memory buttons.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] FREEZE

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 133 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

2 Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION 3 Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i.e., to remain FREEZE display are automati- unchanged), by pressing the [8π†] button. cally saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. However, if you turn the 4 Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function power off without exiting on. from this display, the settings will be lost. 5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order—Registration Sequence

As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings—without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [√][®] buttons or the pedal as you play.

1 Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence (page 132).

2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registering and Recalling Custom Panel specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse through the sequence. Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence. Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence.

4 Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END). STOP ...... Pressing the TAB [®] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” TOP ...... The sequence starts again at the beginning. NEXT BANK...... The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder.

5 Program the Sequence order. The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REG- ISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel. Program the Sequence order from left to right.

134 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the panel, then press the [6π†] (INSERT) button to input the number. • Replacing the number Press the [5π†] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. • Deleting the number Press the [7π†] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor position. • Deleting all numbers Press the [8π†] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence.

6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. CAUTION 7 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button to Settings in the REGISTRATION return to the Main display and confirm whether the Registration SEQUENCE display are auto- Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence pro- matically saved to the instrument when you exit from this grammed above. display. However, if you turn • Use the TAB [®] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the the power off without exiting order of the sequence, or use the TAB [√] button to call them up in from this display, the settings reverse order. The TAB [√] [®] buttons can only be used for Registration will be lost. Sequence when the Main display is called up. Returning to the first • When pedal operation has been set in step 3, you can use a pedal to select Sequence in one action the Registration Memory numbers in order. The pedal can be used for Reg- In the Main display, press the TAB [√] and [®] buttons simul- istration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the dis- taneously. This cancels the cur- play in step 3 above). rently selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by

pressing one of the TAB [√][®] Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups buttons or by pressing the pedal. The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display, letting you conﬁrm the currently selected number.

Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. CAUTION Keep in mind that all Registra- 2 Press the [6†] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 69). tion Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 135 Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Reference to Quick Guide Pages Practicing with the Preset Songs ...... page 35 Playing Back Songs Before Practicing ...... page 35 Displaying Music Notation (Score) ...... page 38 One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ...... page 39 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ...... page 41 Recording Your Performance...... page 42 Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance...... page 54 Connecting a Microphone...... page 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display ...... page 55 Displaying Text ...... page 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke...... page 56 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance ...... page 58 Recording Your Performance as Audio ...... page 60

Compatible Song Types The instrument can play back the following Song types.

Preset Songs Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display.

Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Han- Your Own Recorded Songs dling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 42, page 143) and saved to the Disk, etc)” on page 22. USER/USB display. (USB is available when you connect an USB storage device such as USB flash memory/floppy disk to the instrument.) Before using a floppy disk and the disk slot, be sure to read “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on Commercially Available Song Data page 21. Song data downloaded from the Yamaha Web site and commercially available Disk Commercially available music Songs are available when you connect the optional floppy disk drive to the instru- data is subject to protection by ment. The instrument is compatible with the Song disks (floppy disks) that bear the copyright laws. Copying com- following marks: mercially available data is strictly Using, Creating and Editing Songs prohibited, except for your own personal use.

See page 199 for information on the types of Song data that can be played on the instrument.

136 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Using, Creating and Editing Songs 137 Depending on the particular Depending on the particular also Song data, the Style will same time. at the back play CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Operations for Song Playback for Operations he times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. For details, For he times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. Set the Fade In/Out time T refer to page 109. Starting/Stopping a Song Starting/Stopping ap function his useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo TEMPO] button the [TAP press his useful function lets you cancel the Synchro Start function, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP] the SONG [STOP] simultaneously hold down Start function, cancel the Synchro

T tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) and automatically start the Song at that the instrument is in Synchro while the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) starts automatically at the tempo you playback mode, and the Song Start standby tapped. hile playback is stopped and then press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] is stopped and then press hile playback hich are not covered in the “Quick Guide.” in the “Quick not covered are hich he Fade Out function can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stopping smooth fade-outs when Out function can be used to produce he Fade he Fade In function can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting the starting the In function can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when he Fade his section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback playback related to Song and functions operations explains detailed his section ou can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. start playing as soon as you ou can start playback Stopping Playback Fade Out T In/Out at the is assigned to Fade Press the foot pedal which the Song playback. information on the settings, see to fade out. For want you beginning of the phrase page 191. Synchro Start Y button the SONG [STOP] hold down is stopped, simultaneously When playback button. and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] To button once again. button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] •T Starting Playback Fade In T In/Out is assigned to Fade produce fade-ins, press the foot pedal which To Song. w 191. information on the settings, see page For playback. ■ SONG and press the start Song playback, button to Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] start/ to ways other convenient In addition, there are several button to stop. [STOP] stop a Song. T w Operations for Song Playback Song for Operations Using, Creating and Editing Songs 138 RANDOM repeat. propriate forusewith ALL or settings. These Songsareinap- Lights” foldercontaintheGuide T Song. location (setofmeasures)inthe data, which specifiesacertain grammed markerincertainSong Phrase Markisapre-pro- Phrase Mark: Operations forSongPlayback he presetSongsinthe“Follow CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward) Moving backandforth(rewindfastforward) [PLAY/PAUSE] buttonagainandtheSongwillresumefromcurrentposition. Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttonduringSongplayback. PresstheSONG Pausing theSong ing back. Press theSONG[STOP] button,regardlessofwhether theSongisstoppedorplay- Moving tothetoppositionofSong ■ 2 1 ■ T Repeat Playback/ChainPlayback 2 1 op/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward op/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward rent measurenumber(orPhraseMarknumber). Press the[EXIT]buttontoclosepop-upwindowshowingcur- the window showing theSongposition. Song positionby thephrase marks,pressthe[E]buttonandselect“BAR” in to navigate throughthePhrase MarksintheSong.Ifyou don’t want tosetthe F Main display. It callsupapop-upwindow showing thecurrentmeasurenumberin (rewind andfastforward). Press theSONG[REW]or[FF]buttontomovebackandforth buttons. Theavailableparametersareshownbelow. Set theparametersrelatedtoRepeatPlaybackbyusing[H]/[I] [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. PHRASE MARKREPEAT OFF REPEAT MODE or SongscontainingPhrase Marks,you canusethe[FF]or[REW]buttons → [B]SONGSETTING back (seeabove). andforth(rewind fastforward)” ber arethesameasinsteps1–2ofsection“Moving played back. The Marknum- stepsforspecifyingthePhrase Phrase Marknumberisrepeatedly sponding tothespecified Playback to“ON”or“OFF.” When thisison,thepartcorre- F RANDOM ALL SINGLE or Songs containing Phrase Marks,you cansetRepeat or SongscontainingPhrase folder containingthecurrentSong. Randomly andrepeatedlyplaysback allSongsinthe containing thecurrentSongrepeatedly. Continues playback throughalltheSongsinfolder Plays throughtheselectedSongrepeatedly. Plays throughtheselectedSong,thenstops. Phrase Mark F Phrase Marks F or Songscontaining or Songsnotcontaining Using, Creating and Editing Songs 139 ou can “lock” specific parame- ou can “lock” If the Song data does not contain name this data, the current chord in the Main will not be displayed during Song playback. display Parameter Lock Parameter Y split point, etc.) ters (e.g., effect, only via to make them selectable 132). the panel controls (page CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Operations for Song Playback for Operations ] (Cancel) button. † [B] SONG SETTING ] (QUICK START) button to turn the Quick Start button to turn the Quick ] (QUICK START) → † † † † he chord name is indicated in the Main display. To return to the Main dis- To Main display. name is indicated in the he chord Press the [7 “OFF.” Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. button to start Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] Play chords along with the Song. T button, then press the [EXIT] button. ACCESS] press the [DIRECT play, Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP Auto Accompaniment function. button to enable standby— START] Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC accompaniment as soon as you letting you simultaneously start the start playing. Select a Song (page 35). Select a Style (page 45). ith the default settings, the Quick Start function is turned on. On some Start function is turned on. On some ith the default settings, the Quick 2 Playing Songs with the Quick Start function W Song data, certain settings related to the Song available commercially measure, etc.) are recorded to the first selection, volume, as voice (such the instru- Start is set to “ON,” When Quick before the actual note data. ment reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible to the appropriate tempo at the first down speed, then automatically slows as possible, with a mini- as quickly playback to start you allows This note. a Song is Start is set to “ON,” When Quick mum pause for reading of data. of a be in the middle may directly from the first note (which back played has from the beginning of the measure that to play want measure). If you Start “OFF.” silence prior to the first note, turn Quick 1 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the Accompaniment Features Using the Auto Song Playback Queuing the Next Playback Song Playback Song the Next Queuing empo for playing back a Song and a style at the same time cancel this setting, press the [8 cancel this setting, When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value back When playing the Song is automatically used. he “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name. appears at the upper right of the he “NEXT” indication When the Song playback is stopped, the style playback is also stopped at the same the style playback is stopped, When the Song playback time. •T 6 5 4 2 3 1 When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9–16 in the Song channels a Song and a Style at the same time, back When playing the accompaniment to play you style channels—allowing data are replaced with as along with the Song playback chords playing Try parts of the Song yourself. same a Song and a Style at the back When playing in the instructions below. shown the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. use time, we recommend that you ■ While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is This for playback. up the next Song can queue you back, is playing While a Song stage performance. Song smoothly during it to the next for chaining convenient a Song is while Song Selection display, next in the play want Song you Select the back. playing T To ■ Using, Creating and Editing Songs 140 c V π† press oneofthe[1 w tons instep5toselectthe Voice Press the[C]/[H](VOICE) but- respectively. to the[EXTRA TRACKS] button, ton, andCH3–16areassigned assigned tothe[TRACK 2]but- [TRACK 1]button,CH2is ally, CH1isassignedtothe 9–16 display respectively. Usu- the SONGCH1–8or display. Adjust theparameters in nels intheMIXINGCONSOLE be madeforeach ofthe16chan- c A Songconsistsof16separate [SONG CH9–16]displays About the[SONGCH1–8]/ Adjusting theVolume BalanceandVoice Combination,etc.(MIXINGCONSOLE) hannel. hannels. Separate settingscan oice selectiondisplay forthe hich you want tochange. Then, CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual ] buttonstocallupthe π† ] to[8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Adjusting theVolume BalanceofEachChannel page 88.Below aretwo operation examples. “Editing the Volume Balanceand Voice Combination(MIXINGCONSOLE)”on “SONG CH1–8”or9–16”display instep3oftheBasicProcedure able items(parameters)90. Callupthe intheMIXINGCONSOLEdisplay” onpage Y CONSOLE) V Adjusting theVolume Balanceand 7 ou cansetthemixing-relatedparameters ofaSong.Refertothesection“Adjust- oice Combination,etc.(MIXING 2 1 nected inthe[USB TO DEVICE]terminal. tained inafolder)onUSBstorage device,assoonthedeviceiscon- Y age device Reading SongdataautomaticallywhenconnectingaUSBstor- ou canhave theinstrumentautomaticallycallupfirstSong(notcon- Press the[3 [8 [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. dure. Make suretocheckmark the“VOLUME” iteminstep2oftheSetupproce- of theSETUP(page162). Y Adjust thevolumebalanceofeachchannelbyusing[1 Press the[J]buttontoselect“VOLUME.” of “SONGCH1–8”or9–16.” Press the[MIXINGCONSOLE]buttonrepeatedlytocallupdisplay Select the[VOLVOICE]tabbypressingTAB [ SOLE display. Press the[MIXINGCONSOLE]buttontocallupMIXINGCON- Select aSong(page35). ou cansavethevolumesettingstoSongin Setupoperation π π π π † † † † ] buttons. π π π π → ]/[4 [J]UTILITY π π π π ] (SONGAUTOOPEN)buttontoselect“ON”. → T AB [ √ ][ ® ] MEDIA √ ][ ® ] buttons. π π π π † † † † ]– Using, Creating and Editing Songs 141 hen the Song is selected. urning the keyboard guide ou can save the Guide settings the Guide settings ou can save Saving the Guide settings in the SONG SETTING display Y as a part of the Song data Songs to which (page 162). For been saved, Guide settings have the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled w T lamps off Press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING dis- (in step 1 as described at play left) to turn the keyboard guide lamps off. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Using the Practice Function (Guide) Function the Practice Using ] buttons to call up the Voice selec- the Voice ] buttons to call up † † † † π π π π ]–[8 † † † † π π π π [B] SONG SETTING → 2 The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume Volume “Adjusting the same as in the steps are the The operation (see page 140). of Each Channel” Balance ou can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup selection to the Song in the Voice ou can save the changed Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The following types are available. Call up the setting display: [FUNCTION] operation (page 162). operation (page 2 of the Setup procedure. item in step the “VOICE” Make sure to checkmark Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. Press one of the Y Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE”. Press the [H] button [1 Press one of the channel. tion display for the 1 use the practice function, press the [GUIDE] button. function, press the [GUIDE] use the practice he keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play. to play. notes (location and timing) for you he keyboard guide lamps indicate the ocal performance. 2 1 Selecting the Guide Function Type Selecting the Guide Function To Using the Practice Function (Guide) Using the Practice T using a connected microphone, a Song playback sing along with you Also, when your to match the timing of the Song playback the instrument automatically adjusts v 7 8 6 5 1–4 Changing Voices Voices Changing Using, Creating and Editing Songs 142 Using thePracticeFunction(Guide) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual and theSongplayback continues. play any key. Simplyplay akeyonthekeyboardintimewithmusic(any keyisOK) (any keyisOK)intimewiththerhythm. Songplayback pausesandwaits foryou to W Any key rect notes,Songplayback continues. (page 39).Songplayback pausesandwaits foryou toplay. When you play thecor- W Follow lights For KeyboardPerformance Song playback continues. Song playback pauses,waiting foryou tosing. When you singwithproperpitch, T V the keyboarddonotsound.) (any keyisOK)andtheSongplayback continues.(For thisfunction,thenotesof Song playback pauses,waiting foryou tosing.Simplyplay akeyonthekeyboard y T Karao-key For Karaoke ou singalong. his functionletsyou practice singingwiththeproperpitch. his functionletsyou controltheSongplayback timingwithjustonefinger, while ocal CueTIME ith thisfunction,you canplay themelody ofaSongjustby pressingasinglekey ith thisfunction,thekeyboardguidelampsindicatewhich notesyou shouldplay using the[1 appropriate right-andleft-handchannels to Track 1and2respectively, by If theguidelampsdonotlightasintended,you may needtoassignthe 2 andthechord dataintheSong(when such dataisincluded). T If theguidelampsdonotlightasintended NEXT JUST select thetimingby which thekeyboardguidelampslight. Press the[D]buttoninSONGSETTINGdisplay141) to instep1(page light (GUIDELAMPTIMING) Determining thetimingbywhichkeyboardguidelamps described instep1onthepreviouspage. he guidelampslightaccordingtoSongchannels recordedto Track 1and ...... The guidelampslightintimewiththemusic,at ...... The guidelampslightslightlyaheadofthemusic, ...... π† ]/[2 π† the correcttiming. guide lampsflashifyou failtoplay thekeyswith indicating thenotesyou shouldplay next. The same timingyou shouldplay. ] buttonsintheSONGSETTINGdisplay as Using, Creating and Editing Songs 143 he microphone input signal can he internal memory capacity of his capacity applies to all file T not be recorded. Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity T the instrument is about 3.2MB. T Style, Voice, types, including data files. Song, and Registration CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording ] buttons corresponding † † † † π π π π ]–[8 † † † † π π π π ] buttons to turn each channel on or off. ] buttons to turn each channel on er already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or er already-recorded hich can be used for recording at the same time. can be used for recording at the same hich his method lets you compose your performance by “writing” his convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly quickly method lets you and simple recording his convenient his lets you record a whole Song including several different Song including several record a whole his lets you † † † † T instrument parts, to create the sound of a full band or orchestra. one instrument part one by Record the performance of each can also record You compositions. and create fully orchestrated ov performance. own device) with your a Song on USB storage T in recording solo performance—useful, for example, record your 2 1 (R)] or [TRACK can record to the [TRACK You piano pieces. (STYLE)] track, TRACKS (L)] button, and also to the [EXTRA w T is a non-realtime, manual This one event at a time. it down recording method – similar to writing music notation onto events one by can input notes, chords and other You paper. one (realtime performance is not needed). π π π π ]–[8 † † † † π π π π page 147 page 145 page 144 ➤ ➤ ➤ Use the [1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF display. press the [CHANNEL ON/ not appear, does below shown If the display OFF] button again. Step Recording Multi track Recording Quick Recording urning playback channels of the Song on and off of the Song channels urning playback

hannel of the selected Song playback on or off. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to CH 1 is assigned Usually, on or off. playback the selected Song hannel of

If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other chan- (muting channel only one particular back to play want If you nels), press and hold down one of the [1 2 T turn each can independently You channels. of 16 separate A Song consists c CH 3–16 are 2] button, and 2 is assigned to [TRACK 1] button, CH [TRACK button. TRACKS] assigned to the [EXTRA 1 tep tep S ng di ecor R di ecor R me i t l ea R ng here are three methods as shown below. below. here are three methods as shown hannels, and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. You can also You one. enter notes one by lets you hannels, and Step Recording which ou can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 158). been recorded ou can also edit Songs after they’ve ou can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a them to the User tab display and save performances own ou can record your to the desired channel. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again. press the same cancel solo playback, To to the desired channel. or example, you can edit specific notes one by one, or you can use the Punch In/ use the Punch can one, or you can edit specific notes one by or example, you or details on USB Audio Recording, see page 60. Audio or details on USB or details on MIDI Recording, see page 196. or details on MIDI Recording, see page Out function to re-record a specific part. Y F T Recording Methods F edit the Songs you’ve recorded. edit the Songs you’ve F Recording Your Performance Recording Your Y are available: different recording methods device. Several USB storage and quickly, record performance conveniently you lets Recording which Quick different parts to multiple record several you lets Recording which Multi track c Using, Creating and Editing Songs 144 ually. can recordRIGHT2partindivid- W recorded ontoseparate tracks. T Recording Your Performance he RIGHTand/orLEFTpartsare ith Multi Track Recording,you CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 1 T Quick Recording 3 2 his letsyou conveniently andquickly recordyour performance. A blankSong(“NewSong”)iscalledupforrecording. Press theSONG[REC]and[STOP]buttonssimultaneously. • • • tons toberecorded. While holdingtheSONG[REC]button,pressTRACKbut- • • • • • Below aresomeexamplesettingsyou may want totry. Make thedesiredpanelsettingsforyourkeyboardperformance. SONG[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)]button. Press theSONG[TRACK 1(R)]/[TRACK 2(L)]buttonsandthe Press theSONG[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)]button. Recording Styles and/or theSONG[TRACK 2(L)]buttonfortheleft-handpartrecording. Press theSONG[TRACK 1(R)]buttonfortheright-handpartrecording, Recording yourperformance Press oneoftheREGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8]buttons. panelsetups Using RegistrationMemory Recording Styles v T Recording theLEFTpart tion display (page32). v T Recording theDualvoice(RIGHT1and2parts) play (page32). Select thevoice fortheRIGHT1partby callingupthe Voice selectiondis- Recording theRIGHT1part Recording your performance andtheStyleplaybacksimultaneously Recording yourperformance urn onthePART ON/OFF[SPLIT(LEFT)]button(page81).Selectthe urn onthePART80). Selectthe ON/OFF[DUAL(RIGHT2)]button(page oice fortheLEFTpartby callingupthe Voice selectiondisplay (page32). oice foreach keyboardpart(RIGHT1,2)by callingupthe Voice selec- 2 1 necessary. Set thetempoforrecordingby pressingthe TEMPO [–][+]buttons,as Select aStyle(page45). + Using, Creating and Editing Songs 145 CAUTION or recording to [TRACK 1]/ or recording to [TRACK or recording to [EXTRA pause recording, press the [TRACK 2] recording, press the 2] recording, press [TRACK button. SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] TRACKS (STYLES)] recording, (STYLES)] recording, TRACKS press the STYLE CONTROL button, then [SYNC START] section of the in the chord play keyboard. ou can record your perfor- ou can record your The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). About Channels See page 147. Using the metronome Y the back playing mance while But the metronome (page 30). metronome sound is not recorded. Pausing and restarting your recording To button SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] restart To during recording. the operations recording, follow below. shown •F •F CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording oice Selection display, and select a oice Selection display, oice for the RIGHT 2 part (page 80). urn the PART ON/OFF [DUAL ON/OFF urn the PART Example Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2 part to the channel 2 T call up Then, (RIGHT2)] button on. V v Starting by playing the keyboard Starting in step 3 2 (L)] buttons 1(R)]/[TRACK SONG [TRACK selected the If you’ve of the keyboard (page 79). If you’ve in the right-hand section play above, (STYLES)] button in step 3 above, TRACKS [EXTRA selected the SONG 111). Record- section of the keyboard (page (chord) in the left-hand play the keyboard. a note on play as soon as you ing begins automatically button the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] Starting by pressing a play until you “empty” data is recorded in this way, start recording If you a Song with a short one-or is useful for starting This note on the keyboard. lead-in. or pick-up two-beat button. the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] Starting by pressing and back playing of the Style begin parts (channels) In this case the rhythm recording starts simultaneously. AUSE] button to play back the performance you just recorded. here are several different ways you can start recording. you ways different here are several Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. for recording the keyboard Voices Select parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEFT) (page 32, page 80, page 81). Select a Style for recording also, as necessary (page 45). Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display Press the [SONG SELECT] button for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69). When recording is finished, a message prompting you to save the recorded to save prompting you When recording is finished, a message close the message, press the [EXIT] button. To performance data appears. recording. your See step 7 for instructions on saving Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/ P Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. Press the SONG [STOP] button to • • • Start recording. T 1 A Song consists of 16 separate channels. With this method, you can record data to this method, you With channels. A Song consists of 16 separate and Style parts can be one. Both Keyboard one by independently, channel each recorded. Multi Track Recording Multi Track 7 6 5 4 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 146 Sett Recording Your Performance • • When selectingtheMIDIpart TRACKS (STYLE)]button. button, presstheSONG[EXTRA While holdingtheSONG[REC] nels to“REC”simultaneously See page145. recording Pausing andrestartingyour is notrecorded. mind thatthemetronomesound with thesametempo.Keep in 30) torecordeach channel (page Use theMetronomefunction the sametempo Recording eachchannelwith Setting several channels to Setting asinglechannel to c must alsobesettothesame meaning theexternaldevice ov record, thisrecordsdataonly keyboard orcontrollerto When usinganexternalMIDI MIDI on theexternaldevice. set theMIDItransmit channel y controller torecord,thislets external MIDIkeyboardor is recorded. When usingan any oftheMIDIchannels 1–16 All incomingdatareceived via MIDI CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual hannel. ou recordwithouthaving to i er thesetMIDIchannel— ng a ll o f t h e 9–16c h an- 2 5 4 3 7 6 SONG [REC]buttonagain. cancel thechannel selection,pressthe should berecordedtochannels 9–16. To recorded tochannels 1–8,andtheStyles Normally, thekeyboardpartsshouldbe set thedesiredchannelsto“REC”. press the[1 While holdingtheSONG[REC]button, To P PresstheSONG [PLAY/Listen toyournewlyrecordedperformance. ton. For instructionsonsaving Songdata,seestep8. recorded performanceappears. To closethemessage,press[EXIT] but- When recordingisfinished,amessageappearsprompting you tosave the Press theSONG[STOP]buttontostoprecording. T Start recording. [EXIT] button. To nels” (page147). shown inthesection“About Songchan- Default channel/part assignmentsare to each ofthechannels selectedinstep2. Style (Rhythm 1/2,Bass,etc.)—isrecorded T recorded. desired partforthechanneltobe Use the[C]/[D]buttonstoselect he methodforstartingisthesameasinstep4ofQuick145). Recording(page his determineswhich part—keyboardor AUSE] button to playback the performance youjustrecorded. AUSE] buttontoplaybacktheperformance closePART selection display, pressthe recordanotherchannel, repeatsteps2through6. 2 3 π π π π † † † † ]–[8 + π π π π † † † † ] buttonsto ton, pressthe[2 While holdingtheSONG[REC]but- the “RIGHT2”. Press the[D]buttontoselect c hannel 2to“REC”. π ] buttontosetthe Using, Creating and Editing Songs 147 CAUTION The recorded Song data will The recorded select another be lost if you the power to the Song or turn exe- instrument off without cuting the Save operation (page 69). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording

Style parts RHYTHM1 RHYTHM2 BASS CHORD1 CHORD2 PAD PHRASE1 PHRASE2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Keyboard Parts [F] DIGITAL REC MENU [F] DIGITAL hords, and other extras that make the accompaniment that make the accompaniment hords, and other extras → percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits rhythm percussion is used. the style. to match Voices. piano or guitar etc. organ, choir, c more interesting. RIGHT1 Default Parts Keyboard parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...... as strings, part is used for sustained instruments such This Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display the Song Selection button to call up [SONG SELECT] Press the display the Song Selection save the data in your data, then for saving (page 69). D Channels Channels ASS ...... appropriate instrument sounds uses various bass part The here are three keyboard parts, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. As the 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. here are three keyboard parts, RIGHT B CHORD ...... commonly used with backing, chord is the rhythmic This PA PHRASE ...... stabs, arpeggiated brass used for punchy part is This About keyboard parts T 1–8. Nor- of the channels to each default, the RIGHT 1 part is assigned 1–8. to the channels the keyboard parts should be recorded mally, About Style parts 9–16, is assigned to the channels of the Style parts As the default, each the Style parts should be recorded Normally, below. as shown respectively 9–16. to the channels RHYTHM ...... and is the basic part of the Style, containing the drum This About Song channels below. assignments are shown Default channel/part his method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords. as melodies and record regular music data such his method lets you 2 1 Basic Operations for Step Recording Step Recording T 8 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 148 Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 3 7 6 5 4 F F editing aSong. Press the[A]buttontocallupSongCreatordisplayforrecording/ F F Start StepRecording. Press the[G]buttontocallupSTEPRECORDdisplay. channel forrecording. If youselectthe“1–16”tabinstep4,press[F]buttonto Select theappropriatetabbyusingTAB [ 3 rrcrigcod ...... Selectthe [CHORD] tab...... or recordingchords Selectthe[1–16]tab...... or recordingmelodies rrcrigcod ...... Seepage156...... or recordingchords Seepage149...... or recordingmelodies √ ][ ® ] buttons. 6 5 4 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 149 About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 151. Since the music score displayed score displayed Since the music is generated on the instrument MIDI data, it from the recorded not appear exactly the same may below. as shown CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording 1 2 3 7 6 4 .” 2 3–5 ] button to select the quarter-note length. † † † † 1 tion step numbers. The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following opera- in the notation correspond to the following shown The numbers π π π π * Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [6 according to the Play the keys C3, D3, E3, F3, G3, and A3 in order, notation example. Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [G] button to select “ he explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step Operations apply to step 7 of the section “Basic he explanations here his section explains how to step-record notes, using three music score examples. three music score notes, using to step-record explains how his section Example 1 4 5 3 2 1 Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. Voice Select the T 148. Recording” on page T Recording Melodies Recording Using, Creating and Editing Songs 150 during recording. Press theSONG[STOP] button ning oftheSong. Move thecursortobegin- (page 69). cuting theSaveoperation instrument offwithoutexe- Song orturnthepowerto be lostifyouselectanother The recordedSongdatawill Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION 6 11 10 9 8 7 2 1 Mistakenly enterednotescanbedeleted. Deleting data Press the[J](DELETE)buttontodeleteselected data. select thedatayouwanttodelete. Use the[A]/[B]buttonsinSTEPRECORDdisplay (page148)to iﬁed notelengthwillbeentered. select therestvalue, andonceagaintoactuallyenterit.) A resthaving spec- To Press the[6 (page 69). saving yourdata,thensavethedatainSongSelectiondisplay Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocalluptheSongSelectiondisplayfor (page 158). If you want, you canalsoeditalready recordedSongsinthesamemanner Press the[EXIT]buttontoexitfromStepRecorddisplay. notes. Press theSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] buttontohearthenewlyentered of theSong. Press theSONG[STOP]buttontomovecursorbeginning Play theC4key.

enter therest,use[4 89 π π π π † † † † ] buttontoenteraquarter-noterest. π π π π † † † † ]–[8 π π π π † † † † ] buttons.(Pressthebuttononceto Using, Creating and Editing Songs 151 elocity is determined by how how by elocity is determined he more strongly you play the play he more strongly you can be speci- value he velocity alue and the louder the sound. alue and the louder the alue, the louder the sound About velocity V the keyboard. play strongly you T velocity keyboard, the higher the v T from 1 to ﬁed within a range higher the velocity The 127. v becomes. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording 80% 99% 40% 20% Actual velocity you play the keyboard with the keyboard play you Actual velocity 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 The gate time (note length) can be set to any The gate time (note length) can be set to any using the [DATA desired percentage by dial. ENTRY] button alternately switches the note selectors (at the the note selectors button alternately switches note values: among three basic bottom of the display) normal, dotted and triplet. be entered. be entered...... (loudness) of the note to the velocity Determines ...... to Determines the gate time (note length) of the note ...... the Determines the note type to be entered. Pressing Normal Tenuto Staccato Staccatissimo Manual Itemsrecorded Gate time to be Items to be recorded Velocity Kbd.Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp [H] button [I] button [G] button About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons the [G] [H] [I] be selected via which can About items Record display in the Step Using, Creating and Editing Songs 152 A Recording Your Performance See page151. tons selected viathe[G][H][I]but- b CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual out t h e i tems w hi c h

can b e Select the Voice forrecordingaftercallinguptheStepRecorddisplay. the keyboardwhile executingtheoperation. In thisexample,keepinmindthatoneofthestepsinvolves holdingdown akeyon on page148. T 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 Example 2 he explanationshereapplytostep7ofthe“BasicOperations forStepRecording” Press the[7 Press the[H]buttontoselect the“Staccato”. Before you goontostep6,releasetheF3key andthe[7 While holdingF3onthekeyboard,press[7 Press the[5 Press the[I]buttontoselect“normal”notetype. Press the[H]buttontoselect“Tenuto.” Press the[G]buttontoselect“ * The numbers shown inthesheetcorrespondtofollowing operation step numbers. 1 π π π π π π π π – 01 14–16 10–13 2–5 † † † † † † † † ] buttontoselecttheeighth-note length. ] buttontoselectthehalf-notelength. 6–8 4 .” 9 π π π π † † † † π π π π ] button. † † † † ] button. 1 3 2 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 153 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording .” ] button to select the quarter-note length. ] button to select the quarter-note ] button to select the dotted half-note length. ] button to select † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π 17 18 ou can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 158). ou can also edit the Songs you’ve Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from Y to call up the Song Selection display for button Press the [I] (SAVE) saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69). Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered button to hear Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] notes. Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning Press the SONG [STOP] button to of the Song. Play the A3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example. Play the A3 key on the keyboard, note type. Press the [I] button to select “normal” Press the [6 as speciﬁed in the example. Play the F3 key on the keyboard, Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [H] button to select “dotted.” Press the [I] button Press the [5 Press the [G] button to select “ Press the [G] button Play the keys E3, F3, and A3 in order, according to the notation exam- to the notation according A3 in order, keys E3, F3, and Play the ple. 20 19 18 16 17 14 15 13 11 12 9 10 8 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 154 Recording Your Performance See page151. tons selected viathe[G][H][I]but- A b CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual out t h e i tems w hi c h

can b e Select the Voice forrecordingaftercallinguptheStepRecorddisplay. the keyboardwhile executingtheentireoperations. In thisexample,keepinmindthatoneofthestepsinvolves holdingdown akeyon on page148. T 4 3 2 1 Example 3 he explanationshereapplytostep7ofthe“BasicOperations forStepRecording” steps. Do notreleasetheC3keyyet. Keep holdingitwhile executingthefollowing While holdingC3keyonthekeyboard,press[7 Press the[7 Press the[I]buttontoselect“normal”notetype. Press the[H]buttontoselect“Normal.” π π π π † † † † ] buttontoselecttheeighthnote. operation stepnumbers. * The numbers shown inthesheetcorrespondtofollowing 1–4 5 67 3 π π π π † † † † ] button. 1 2 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 155 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording ] † † † † π π π π ] button. † † † † π π π π ] button, release the keys. † † † † π π π π ] button, and successively press the [5 ] button, and successively press the ] button. † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for button Press the [I] (SAVE) saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69). Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. recorded Songs in the same manner can also edit already you want, If you (page 158). Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. After you press the [5 After you While holding the C3, E3, G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard, press the While holding the C3, E3, G3 and [7 While holding the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, press the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, While holding the [7 button. executing them while holding Keep keys yet. the C3 and E3 Do not release steps. the following exe- holding them while Keep yet. Do not release the C3, E3 and G3 keys steps. cuting the following While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7 press the E3 keys on the keyboard, the C3 and While holding 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 156 Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual on page148. T the StepRecordfunction. with precisetiming. These instructionsshow how torecordchord changes using Y Recording Chords 3 2 1 4 ou canrecordChordsandSections(Intro,Main,Ending,soon)oneatatime he explanationshereapplytostep7ofthe“BasicOperations forStepRecording” 4 Press theSTYLECONTROL[BREAK]button. Play thechordsC,FandGinchordsectionof thekeyboard. Press the[5 then presstheSTYLECONTROL[MAINVARIATION A]button. Make suretheSTYLECONTROL[AUTOFILLIN]buttonissettoOFF, 1 * The numbers shown inthenotationcorrespondtofollowing operation step nu π π π π mbers. † † † † ] buttontoselectthehalf-notelength. FGF CF 2 MAIN A , , 8,9 5,6 2,3 147 5 BREAK 7C G7 3 G C F MAIN B 6 G7 F Using, Creating and Editing Songs 157 CAUTION ARIATION (A, B, C, D)] pattern (A, B, ARIATION TION (A, B, C, D)] buttons. C, D)] TION (A, B, urn the STYLE CONTROL The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted (page 150). Entering fill-ins T FILL IN] button to ON, [AUTO and simply press one of the VARI- STYLE CONTROL [MAIN A appropriate fill-in section (The and then automatically plays goes to the selected [MAIN V playback.) CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording C 9 ] button to select the whole-note length. ] button to select the whole-note ] button to select the quarter-note length. length. to select the quarter-note ] button 8 † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π 7 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change Press the [F] (EXPAND) data into the Song data. to call up the Song Selection display for button Press the [I] (SAVE) saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69). Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from recorded Songs in the same manner edit already can also you want, If you (page 158). Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard. Play the chord C in the chord section move the cursor to the beginning Press the SONG [STOP] button to of the Song. the newly entered button to hear Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] notes. Press the [4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button. [MAIN VARIATION STYLE CONTROL Press the Press the [6 Press the of the keyboard. chord section and G7 in the chords F, Play the 14 13 12 11 10 8 9 6 7 5 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 158 Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Recording, Multi Track Recording,orStepRecording. Y Editing aRecordedSong 4 3 2 1 Basic EditingOperation ou canedittheSongsyou’ve recordedwithany recordingmethod—Quick 3 • • • • • the Song. Select theappropriatetabbyusingTAB [ or editSongs. Press the[A]buttontocallupSONGCREATOR displaytorecord [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. Select aSongforediting. T page166 Editing Lyrics(LYRICS)...... T page 165 ...... Editing SystemEvent(SYS/EX.) T page163 ...... Editing NoteorChordEvents(CHORD,1–16) transpose notesby channel. T page160 ...... Editing ChannelEvents(CHANNEL) T page159 ...... —Punch In/Out(RECMODE) Re-Recording aSpecificSection his letsyou change theSongnameorlyricsevents. his letsyou change thetempoortimesignature. his letsyou change ordeletetherecorded notesorchords. his letsyou editthechannel events. For example,you candeletedataor his letsyou re-recordaspecificsectionof Song. → [F] DIGITAL RECMENU √ ][ ® ] buttonsandedit Using, Creating and Editing Songs 159 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording ] π† ] buttons. + π† ] buttons to determine the settings for re- ] buttons to determine USE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro play USE] button or when you † † † † his deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. his deletes all data after the point at which he Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as then starts overwrite normally, back he Song plays normally up to the beginning of the indi- back he Song plays he Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as recording is stopped is regarded he Song position at which button. T Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [PLAY/ recording starts Overwrite PA mode. Standby T the keyboard. play soon as you T recording at that In measure, then starts overwrite cated Punch can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3 You point. T setting maintains all data after the This Out point. the Punch recording is stopped. point at which recording continues until the beginning of the Actual overwrite measure (set with the corresponding display Out specified Punch and normal playback point recording stops button), at which all data after the point at which setting maintains This continues. can set the Punch Out measure by You recording is stopped. pressing the [6 π π π π ]–[6 † † † † π π π π Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for button to call up the Song Selection display Press the [I] (SAVE) in the Song Selection display saving your data, then save the data (page 69). Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the key- button to start Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] recording at the Punch Out board at the Punch In point and stop point. While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the desired track but- While holding the SONG [REC] button, ton. Use the [1 recording (see below). PUNCH OUT settings PUNCH IN settings he explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Edit- in apply to the REC MODE display he explanations here REPLACE ALL NORMAL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH IN AT PUNCH OUT PUNCH OUT AT ■ ■ 4 3 2 1 When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch the Punch Song, use section of an already-recorded a specific When re-recording In point and between the Punch only the data In this method, IN/OUT function. in mind Keep with the newly recorded data. point is overwritten Out the Punch are not recorded over, In/Out points and after the Punch that the notes before In/Out in the Punch guide you normally to back hear them play will although you Out points as measure numbers In and Punch can specify the Punch You timing. In/Out record- Punch or manually execute the operation, beforehand for automatic the keyboard. playing or simply by Pedal Foot using a ing by T 158. on page ing Operation” Re-Recording a Specific Section—Punch In/ Specific Section—Punch a Re-Recording MODE) Out (REC Using, Creating and Editing Songs 160 to reverse the control (page 191). to reverse thecontrol(page essary, change thepedal polarity nected totheinstrument.Ifnec- the particularpedalyou've con- may bereversed dependingon P Recording Your Performance edal Punch In/Outoperation CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual ■ in aneight-measurephrase arere-recorded. T T Examples ofre-recordingwithvariousPunchIn/Outsettings Editing Operation onpage158. T Editing ChannelEvents(CHANNEL) Punch In/OutfunctionissettoON. current functionassignmentofthesostenutopedaliscancelledwhen thePedal as you want duringplayback, topunch in/outofoverwrite recording.Notethatthe stops recording(Punch Out).You canpressandrelease thesostenutopedalasoften sostenuto pedalinstantlyenablesPunch Inrecording,while releasingthepedal and punch-out points. While aSongisplaying back, pressing(andholding)the When thisissettoON,you canusethesostenutopedaltocontrolpunch-in 3 2 1 PUNCH OUTAT=006 PUNCH INAT=003 PUNCH OUT PUNCH INAT=003 REPLACE ALL PUNCH INAT=003 PUNCH OUTAT=006 FIRST KEYON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEYON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEYON PUNCH OUTAT=006 NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUTsetting PUNCH INsetting he illustrations below indicateavariety ofsituationsinwhich selectedmeasures his instrumentfeaturesseveral differentways you usethePunch In/Outfunction. he explanationshereapplytotheCHANNELtabdisplay inthe step4oftheBasic Pedal PunchIn/Outsettings F has onelevel; onlytheimmediateoperation canbeundone. if you arenotsatisfied withtheOperation results. The Undo function only pleted, thisbuttonchanges to“UNDO,” lettingyou restoretheoriginaldata After theoperation (withtheexceptionof SETUPmenudisplay) iscom- rent display. Press the[D](EXECUTE)buttontoexecuteoperation forthecur- Use the[1 Use the[A]/[B]buttonstoselectEditmenu(page 161). or informationontheavailable parameters, seepage161. *2 To stoprecording,pressthe[REC]button attheendofmeasure5. *1 To avoid recordingfrommeasure3 overwriting measures1-2,start π π π π † † † † ]–[8 Play back data) (Original Play back data) (Original Play back data) (Original Play back data) (Original Play back data) (Original Play back data) (Original overwrite recording Start overwrite recording Start overwrite recording Start Original data Original π π π π † † † † 12345678 12345 12345678 12345678 12345 12345678 12345678 12345 12345678 1234567 ] buttonstoeditthedata. *1 *1 *1 Start overwrite recording Start overwrite recording Start overwrite recording Start overwrite recording start Play thekeyboard to overwrite recording start Play thekeyboard to overwrite recording start Play thekeyboard to Stop recording Stop recording Stop recording Stop recording Stop overwrite recording/Play data original Stop recording Stop recording Stop overwrite recording/Play data original Stop overwrite recording/Play data original *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 Deleted data Newly recordeddata Previously recordeddata 8 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 161 CAUTION he Quantize size or resolution he Quantize size or resolution The recorded Song data will The recorded select another be lost if you the power to the Song or turn exe- instrument off without cuting the Save operation (page 69). (resolu- About Quantize size tion) T per quar- is the number of clocks ter note. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording sixteenth note + eighth note triplet* sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet* ] buttons, then press the [D] thirty-second note eighth note + eighth note triplet* After eighth note quantization π† Quarter-note length ]–[8 π† note sixteenth note triplet Original data eighth note sixteenth eighth note triplet Quantizing strength=50 Quantizing strength=100 he three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally conve-he three Quantize settings marked with asterisks quarter note quarter note triplet nient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same to quantize two different note values nient, since they allow you the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are example, when time. For eighth notes, all the straight quantize by contained in the same channel, if you are quantized to straightnotes in the channel eighth notes—completely elimi- use the eighth note + eighth note triplet if you triplet feel. However, nating any setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved the specified quantization beats according to the specifiedtoward percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. T Settings Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized. Determines the channel results, you should set the optimum Selects the quantize size (resolution). For example, if eighth Quantize size to the shortest note value For in the channel. should use eighth note as the Quantize notes are the shortest in the channel, you size. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for display for up the Song Selection button to call [I] (SAVE) Press the display Song Selection the data in the data, then save saving your (page 69). Deleting the data of the specified channel (DELETE menu) QUANTIZE menu QUANTIZE hose data to be deleted by using the [1 hose data to be deleted by he Quantize function allows you to align you allows he Quantize function STRENGTH SIZE CHANNEL ou can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel channel in the Song. Select the ou can delete the data of the specified channel (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. ■ Y w ■ T For notes in a channel. the timing of all the record the musical phrase example, if you it with not play may at right, you shown performance and your absolute precision, of or behind been slightly ahead have may Quantize is a conve- the precise timing. for this. of correcting nient way 4 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 162 Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual While holdingthe[G](ALLCH)button,pressoneof[1 T and Channels9–16. Press the[F]buttontotogglebetweentwo channel displays—Channels 1–8, To by T ■ different channel. Italsoletsyou copy thedatafromonechannel toanother. T ■ ■ Song starts. Console andpanelsettingsrecordedhereareautomaticallyrecalledwhen the tings canberecordedtothetoppositionofSongasSetupdata. The Mixing T SETUP menu his allows you totranspose therecordeddataofindividual channels upordown his functionletsyou mixthedataoftwo channels andplacetheresultsina he currentsettingsoftheMixingConsole(page88)displays andotherpanelset- ransposing tothesamevalueforallchannelssimultaneously amaximumoftwo octaves insemitoneincrements. displaythechannels9–16 CHANNEL TRANSPOSEmenu Mixing (merging)thedataofspecifiedtwochannels(MIXmenu) Setup recordingprocedure 3 2 1 DESTINATION SOURCE 2 SOURCE 1 Checkmark theselecteditem bypressingthe[8 automatically calledupwhentheSongstarts. Use the[1 [ [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. √ MIC SETTING L GUIDE SETTING SCORE SETTING KEYBOARD VOICE SONG YRICS SETTING ][ ® ] CHANNEL π π π π † † † † → ]–[7 [F]DIGITAL RECMENU → π π π π Records thesettingsinLyrics display. Mixing Consoledisplay88). (page Records themicrophoneand Vocal Harmony settingsinthe ON/OFF setting. Records thesettingsofGuidefunctionsincluding Records thesettingsinScoredisplay. top positionoftheSong). canberecordedonlytothe Song (theotheritemsinthischart the One Touch Setting. This canberecordedatany pointina P keyboard parts(RIGHT1,2,andLEFT)theiron/offstatus. Records thepanelsettingsincluding Voice selectionofthe Console. Records thetemposettingandallsettingsmadefromMixing placed. Selects thechannel intowhich themixorcopyresultswillbe destination channel. (The originalchannel dataismaintained.) 1iscopiedtothe “COPY” isselectedhere,thedatafromSource to copy 1tothedestinationchannel.If thedatafromSource you tion tothevalues 1–16,thereisa“COPY”settingthatallows Inaddi- selected channel arecopiedtothedestinationchannel. inthe Selects thechannel (1–16)tobemixed.Onlynoteevents selected channel arecopiedtothedestinationchannel. Selects thechannel (1–16)tobemixed. All MIDIeventsinthe anel settingsrecordedherearesameastheonesmemorizedto [B]SETUP † † † † ] buttonstodeterminethesettingsbe → [A]SONGCREATOR π† π π π π ] button. ]–[8 π† ] buttons. → T AB Using, Creating and Editing Songs 163 CAUTION CAUTION he data recorded by Realtime he data recorded by ou can select the event types to ou can select the event only the note ou wish to have The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). T Recording will not appear on the and cannot be edited. display The recorded Song data will The recorded Song data be lost if you select another to the Song or turn the power exe- instrument off without cuting the Save operation (page 69). Selecting multiple lines of data While holding the [J] (MULTI SELECT) button, press the [A]/[B] buttons. Displaying specific types of event (FILTER) Y in the [CHORD] be displayed is This and [1-16] tab displays. for example, when convenient, y (page 165). shown events CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording ]– π† ] buttons. π† [3 ] (CANCEL) button before move button before move ] (CANCEL) † ] buttons to edit the parameter value. The The value. ] buttons to edit the parameter π† ] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the ] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete π ]/[5 ]–[8 π† π† alue, simply move the cursor away from the parameter. from the the cursor away alue, simply move Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited. parameter Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the Use the [4 actually enter an edited To dial can also be used. ENTRY] [DATA v Editing the data line by line Use the [6 events. Editing each parameter of the data 1 2 restore the original value, press the [8 restore the original value, move the cursor up or down move ...... Use the [A]/[B] button. the cursor to the top data...... Press move the [C] button. units Measure/Beat/Clock the cursor by move ....Use the [1 the cursor. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for button Press the [I] (SAVE) saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69). When the CHORD tab display is selected, press the [F] (EXPAND) but- press the [F] (EXPAND) When the CHORD tab display is selected, data. ton to convert the data into Song Edit the data. To When the 1–16 tab display is selected, press the [F] button to select display is selected, press the [F] When the 1–16 tab edited. the channel to be Move the cursor to the desired data. To To To Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving Song Selection display to call up the button [I] (SAVE) Press the 69). display (page in the Song Selection then save the data your data, Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording oper- the SETUP recording to execute [D] (EXECUTE) button Press the ation. 4 5 he explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the displays apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab he explanations here 5 4 3 2 1 Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) or Chord Events (CHORD, Editing Note T on page 158. Basic Editing Operation Using, Creating and Editing Songs 164 1/1920th ofaquarternote. instrument, oneclock isequalto clocks perquarternote.Onthe Quantize sizeisthenumberof A unitofnoteresolution. The About Clock Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual About theeventsshownindisplay Event typesshownontheCHORDtabdisplay Event typesshownonthe1–16tabdisplay 3 2 1 S.Vol CH.Vol OnOff Sect Chord T Style A.T. (Aftertouch) P (Program Change) Prog Ctrl (ControlChange) Note .Bnd (PitchBend) empo Indicates theevent values. Indicates theevent types(seebelow). at thelower leftofthedisplay. Indicates thelocation(position)ofcorrespondingevent. Sameastheindication Example 23 12 Overall volume ofthe Accompaniment Style V Style On/off statusforeachpart(channel) ofthe Accompaniment Ending) In,Break, Accompaniment StyleSection(Intro,Main,Fill c tempo Style after thenoteisplayed. T Data forchanging thepitchofa Voice continuously. MIDI programchange numberforselecting a Voice. page 88), etc. effect depth(editedviatheMixingConsoledescribedon Settings tocontrolthe Voice, such asvolume, and pan,filter gate timevalue (thelengthofanote). v w T hord root,chord type,onbasschord elocity value basedonhowhardthekeyisplayed, andthe his event isgeneratedwhen pressureisappliedtoakey he individual noteofaSong.Includesthenumber olume foreach part (channel) ofthe Accompaniment Style hich correspondstothekeywhich was played, plusa Measure number (BAR) 001 : 1 : 1440 Beat Clock Using, Creating and Editing Songs 165 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 69). CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Recording Your Performance Your Recording ] buttons. † † † † π π π π ]–[5 † † † † π π π π ] buttons. † † † † other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that checkmarks this enters other words, vice versa. and were previously unchecked π π π π ou cannot create new data or change of the data the contents Determines the top measure of a Song. Determines the tempo value. Determines the time signature. Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown on the display. detailed changes to the XG parame- to make various you Allows Data List in the separate ters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” booklet for details. in mind data in the Song. Keep the System Exclusive Displays cannot create new data or change the contents of the that you and paste the can delete, cut, copy, you data here; however, data. in mind that the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep Displays y and paste the data. can delete, cut, copy, you here; however, ]/[7 † † † † π π π π [H] (ALL ON)...... Checkmarks types. for all event [I] (NOTE/CHORD).....Selects data. only NOTE/CHORD [J] (INVERT) ...... Reverses settings for all boxes. In the checkmark the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to execute MAIN ...... Call display. up the Main Filter CTRL CHG ...... Call display. up the Control Change Filter STYLE ...... Call Display. Accompaniment Style Filter up the Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by or remove the checkmark for the Checkmark (show) using the [6 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays. button in the edit displays. Press the [H] (FILTER) type by using the [2 Select the event ime (Time Signature) ime (Time empo he explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Edit- tab display he explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] rom this display, you can edit recorded System Exclusive events, which do not which events, Exclusive can edit recorded System you rom this display, ScBar (Score Start Bar) T T Key (Key Signature) XGPrm (XG Parameters) SysEx (System exclusive) Meta (Meta Event) Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your your for saving Selection display button to call up the Song Press the [I] (SAVE) (page 69). the data in the Song Selection display data, then save System Events T on page 158. ing Operation F opera- The as tempo and beat (time signature). such belong to a specific channel, in the section “Editing Note or Chord tions here are basically the same as those on page 163. Events” Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.) Editing System Exclusive Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below. below. as shown displays Filter the respective Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up 4 2 3 1 In the edit displays various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult sometimes It may are shown. events types of various displays In the edit in function comes the Filter is where This to edit. want the ones you to pinpoint in the edit displays. shown types will be event which determine It lets you handy. Displaying Specific Types of Events (FILTER) Types Specific Displaying Using, Creating and Editing Songs 166 (page 69). cuting theSaveoperation instrument offwithoutexe- Song orturnthepowerto be lostifyouselectanother The recordedSongdatawill Recording Your Performance CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION L Events” onpage163. T Operation onpage158.From thisdisplay, you canedittherecordedLyrics events. T Editing Lyrics (LYRICS) oto oe CR Control Codes L Name yrics Events he operations herearebasicallythesameasinsection“EditingNoteorChord he explanationshereapplytotheLYRICS tabdisplay instep4oftheBasicEditing yrics 1 Inputting andEditingLyrics 2 Use the[4 (page 69). saving yourdata,thensavethedatainSongSelectiondisplay Press the[I](SAVE) buttontocalluptheSongSelectiondisplayfor Operations arethesameasinsection“EnteringCharacters” (page72). editing display. π π π π † † † † ]/[5 π π π π next setoflyrics. event may deletethecurrentlydisplayed lyricsanddisplay the Unavailable ontheinstrument.OnsomeMIDIdevices,this LF Enters alinebreakinthelyricstext. Allows you toenterlyrics. Allows you toentertheSongname. † † † † ] (DATA ENTRY) buttonstocallupthelyrics Using a Microphone

Reference to Quick Guide pages Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance...... page 54 Connecting a Microphone...... page 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display ...... page 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ...... page 56 Adjusting the tempo ...... page 31 Transpose ...... page 56 Applying effects to Your Voice ...... page 56 Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice...... page 57 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME)...... page 142 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance...... page 58 Changing the Key (Transpose)...... page 58 Displaying the Music Score on Instrument and Lyrics on TV.... page 59 Making Announcements Between Songs ...... page 59 Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ...... page 142

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters This section explains brieﬂy how to create your own Vocal Harmony (page 57) types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. Up to ten Vocal Harmony types can be created and saved.

1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [H] (VOCAL HARMONY TYPE) button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE selection display. Using a Microphone

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 167 Using a Microphone 168 Editing Vocal HarmonyParameters executing thesaveoperation. turn thepoweroffwithout V if youchangetoanother The settingsherewillbelost ocal Harmonytypeoryou CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION 3 5 4 8 7 6 you wanttoedit. (RETURN) buttontoreturnthe Vocal Harmony selectiondisplay. Or you canre-selectthe Vocal Harmony typeby pressingthe[8 [2 display. edited. Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaVocal Harmonytypetobe (page 69). Press the[I](SAVE) button tosaveyoureditedVocal Harmonytype Set thevalueofparameterselectedabove. Use the[3 If youwanttore-selecttheVocal Harmonytype,usethe[1 Press the[8 33 π π π π † † † † ] buttons. π π π π † † † † † † † † ] (EDIT)buttontocalluptheVOCALHARMONYEDIT 567 ]–[5 π π π π † † † † ] buttonstoselecttheparameter(page169) 4 π† π π π π 8 † † † † ] ]/ Using a Microphone 169 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters Harmony Vocal Editing he gender of the harmony sound is not changed. he gender of the harmony he gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically. sound is changed he gender of the harmony he corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. he corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. T T No gender change occurs. No gender change can adjust the LEAD GENDER You occurs. No gender change DEPTH below. T T hen the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. is set to other than TYPE above hen the LEAD GENDER hen a note is produced. Higher values result in a longer delay. he higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony he higher the value, voice TYPE the LEAD GENDER when is only effective his parameter hanged or not. alue, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The The alue, the more “feminine” the harmony becomes. voice The alue, the more “feminine” the harmony becomes. voice Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro- notes are applied how the harmony Determines mode (page when the Harmony phone sound 173) is set to “VOCODER.” applied to the micro- notes are Determines how the harmony Harmony mode (pagephone sound when the 173) is set to “CHORDAL.” gender of the harmony the Determines whether sound is c Off Auto Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal and sound Determines whether changed.(i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be note Please that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the When set to Off, three harmony notes are pro- selected type. duced. Other settings produce two notes. harmony Off Unison Male Female Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change. This is available is available This Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change. w T the more “masculine” the voice. the value, lower The becomes. T is set to other than Off. above When Smooth or Hard is selected, the pitch is of the lead vocal shifted in precise semitone steps. or reaches when the harmony pitch will occur Gender change exceeds the specified of semitones above number vocal the lead pitch. or reaches will occur when the harmony pitch Gender change exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch. Adjusts the degree of gender changeharmony notes applied to higher the The THRESHOLD. higher than the UPPER GENDER v the voice. the more “masculine” the value, lower Adjusts the degree of gender changeharmony notes applied to higher the The THRESHOLD. than the LOWER GENDER lower v the voice. the more “masculine” the value, lower Also Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. TYPE the LEAD GENDER affects the lead vocal sound when is set to other than Off. above the lead vocal Also affects Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. is set to other than TYPE above the LEAD GENDER sound when Off. before the vibrato effect begins Specifies the length of the delay w VOCODER TYPE VOCODER CHORDAL TYPE TYPE HARMONY GENDER LEAD GENDER TYPE LEAD GENDER DEPTH LEAD PITCH CORRECT UPPER GENDER THRESH- OLD LOWER GENDER THRESH- OLD UPPER GENDER DEPTH LOWER GENDER DEPTH DEPTH VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO DELAY VIBRATO Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display HARMONY EDIT in the VOCAL Parameters Editable Using a Microphone 170 Adjusting theMicrophoneandHarmonySound CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 2 1 mony Sound Adjusting theMicrophoneandHar- PITCH TONOTEPART PITCH TONOTE HARMONY1/2/3 DETUNE HARMONY1/2/3 PAN HARMONY1/2/3 VOLUME TING display. Press the[I](MICSETTING)buttontocallupMICROPHONESET- [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. → [G] MICSETTING/VOCAL HARMONY the leadvocal when thePitch toNoteparameteris“ON.” Determines which oftheinstrumentpartswillbecontrolledby the volume ofthetonegenerator.) mind, however, thatdynamic changes inyour voice donotaffect v ment withyour voice. (The instrumenttracks thepitch ofyour When thisissetto“ON,” you can“play” thevoices oftheinstru- notes by numberofcents. thespecified (lowest), second,andthird(highest)harmony Detunes thefirst L63>R –CLRpansthesoundhardleft,while 173) issetto“VOCODER”mony or“CHORDAL.” mode(page ever thekeyboardisplayed. This iseffective when theHar- T he stereo position of the sound will change randomly when- he stereopositionofthesoundwillchange 2 Using a Microphone 171 CAUTION Settings in the OVERALL SET- TING tab display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from the dis- if you turn the However, play. power off without exiting settings the from this display, will be lost. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s 6 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound and Harmony Microphone the Adjusting 3 5 ] buttons to set the value. † † † † π π π π ] button to select the OVERALL SETTING tab display. SETTING tab to select the OVERALL ] button ]–[8 √ † † † † π π π π 44 Use the [1 the MICROPHONE SETTING dis- Press the [EXIT] button to exit from play. Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the item (parameter) (see below) to Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the be adjusted. Press the TAB [ TAB Press the his turns the Noise Gate on or off. the gate begins to open. at which his adjusts the input level 3BAND EQ of the corresponding band. Adjusts the center frequency up to 12 dB. of the corresponding band by Boosts or cuts the level NOISE GATE SW (Switch) T TH. (Threshold) T his effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below falls below the input from the microphone his effect mutes the input signal when ■ EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple the frequency EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides frequency can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall bands, which MID and HIGH) three-band (LOW, instrument features a high-grade The response. digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. •Hz •dB T the desired sig- noise, allowing off extraneous cuts effectively This a specified level. etc.) to pass. nal (vocal, • • ■ Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the OVERALL SETTING Tab in the OVERALL SETTING Tab Adjustable Items (Parameters) Display 5 6 4 3 Using a Microphone 172 Adjusting theMicrophoneandHarmonySound CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual • • T ■ • •RA • • parts louderandloudsofter. have widelyvarying dynamics. Iteffectively “compresses”thesignal, makingsoft exceeds aspecifiedlevel. This isespeciallyusefulforsmoothingoutvocals that T ■ he following parameters determinehow theharmony iscontrolled. his effectholdsdown theoutputwhen theinputsignalfrommicrophone Harmony isoutput;when itisset to L63>H,onlytheleadvocal isoutput. When thisissettoL

The special website can be You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the spe- opened when directly connect- cial Clavinova website by directly connecting the instrument to the Internet. This ing the Clavinova to the Internet. section contains terms related to computers and online communications. If there are some terms you are unfamiliar with, refer to the Internet Glossary (page 188).

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For specific instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible LAN adaptors, rout- Depending on the Internet con- ers, etc.), refer to the Yamaha website: nection, you may not be able to http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connect- the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect ing the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from with the Clavinova. If in doubt, the instrument itself. check your contract or contact your provider. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider.

Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)

Modem* Router LAN cable No router capability Cable type Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port. LAN cable Due to EU regulations, users LAN port within Europe should use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent electromagnetic interference. * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Some types of modems require an optional hub network for Connection example 2: simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as com- Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) puter, musical instrument, etc.). ADSL modem LAN cable Router capability

LAN cable Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port. LAN port

Connection example 3: Wireless connection

Modem* Access point

A USB wireless LAN adaptor Wireless Game Adaptor also can be used. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Connecting the Clavinova

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

176 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 177 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Accessing the Special Website the Accessing Scroll bar close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument, display the operation and return to close the website display rom the special website, you can audition and purchase Song data, among other data, among other Song and purchase can audition website, you rom the special When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser at one time in the browser large to be shown When the size of the web page is too Use at the right side of the display. of the instrument, a scroll bar appears display of the and view those parts dial to scroll through the display ENTRY] the [DATA page that are not shown. Operations in the Special Website Operations in the Scrolling the Display To press the [EXIT] button. F instrument is the while [INTERNET] button, the site, press the access To things. to the Internet. connected Accessing the Special Website Special the Accessing Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 178 Operations intheSpecialWebsite CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual dial. Pressthe[8 select thelink,press[6 When thereisalinkinthepage,itshown asabuttonorincoloredtext,etc. To Following Links return tothepageselectedbeforepressing[1 To Return tothePreviousWeb Page password orsearching fordata,refertothe“EnteringCharacters” onpage73. T Entering Characters Y [2 ou canalsoselectandcalluplinksby usingthe[A]–[J]buttons. his sectionexplainshow toentercharacters withinthewebsite,forinputtinga π† returntoapreviouslyselectedwebpage,pressthe[1 ] (FORWARD) button. π ] (ENTER)buttontoactuallycallupthelinkdestination. † ]/[7 π† ]/[8 † ] buttonsorusethe[DATA ENTRY] π† ] (BACK) button,pressthe π† ] (BACK) button. To Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 179 using data encryption and SSL: is an Layer) SSL (Secure Sockets industry-standard method for protecting web communications by other tools. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ] Operations in the Special Website Special in the Operations π 13 4 2 ] (REFRESH) button. π Message he following three messages are displayed according to the loading status of three messages are displayed he following When is not connected with the Internet. the instrument his appears when ﬂashes. he web page is being loaded. Icon 2 he messages and icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate display at the bottom right of the Internet he messages and icons T the web page. “Disconnected” T page cannot be seen. Icon 1 is displayed. the web this message is displayed, “Now opening web page... ” T page has been displayed. ” “Web completely. and the page is displayed Loading of the web page is completed, dis- web page uses SSL, icon 3 is When the displayed Icon 2 stops ﬂashing. for communication. and information is encrypted played, connecting to the Internet by in 4 when Strength of the reception is displayed the instrument near the access When reception is weak, move wireless LAN. reception. point to improve Monitoring the Internet Connection Status Monitoring the T connection status. the current Internet cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press the [6 page (if the page is taking too long cancel loading of a refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page, or to of the page, version the latest have sure you web page (to make refresh a

a Web Page Page a Web To the [5 try reloading), press Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of Loading Page/Canceling a Web Refreshing To (STOP) button. (STOP) Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 180 Operations intheSpecialWebsite download. the instrumentoffduring lost ifyouturnthepowerto The purchased datawillbe CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CAUTION call upthenexthighestlevel folder. select “NO” When theFile Selectiondisplay isopen,pressthe[8 from which you canselectthedownloaded data. To returntotheInternetdisplay, open theFile Selectiondisplay. Select“YES”tocalluptheFile Selectiondisplay, When downloading iscompleted,amessageappearsaskingyou whether ornotto Operation afterpurchase anddownload loading data,refertotheinstructionsonsiteitself. other typesofdatafromthespecialwebsite.For detailsonpurchasing anddown- Y Purchasing andDownloadingData 2 1 can beinstantlycalledupinthefuture. Y Registering BookmarksofYour FavoritePages ou canpurchase anddownload Songdata(forplayback onthisinstrument)and ou can“bookmark”thepageyou’re viewing,andsetupacustomlinksothepage • • described below. T Download Destination (ADD) button. Call upthedisplayforregisteringbookmarksbypressing[3 T currently registeredbookmarks. MARK) button.TheBookmarkdisplayappears,showingalistofthe W he download destinationdependsontheuseofstorage media,as he titleofthecurrentlyselectedwebpageisshown below thelist. c When aUSBstorage deviceisnotconnectedtotheinstrumentduringpur- c When aUSBstorage deviceisconnectedtotheinstrumentduringpur- ith thedesiredpagecurrentlyselected,press[4 hase: hase: the nexthighestlevel folder, pressthe[8 tab display oftheFile Selectiondisplay. To close thefolderandcallup T Selection display. the nexthighestlevel folder, pressthe[8 tab display oftheFile Selectiondisplay. To closethefolderandcallup T Selection display. he downloaded dataissaved inthe“MyDownloads” folderintheUser he downloaded dataissaved inthe“MyDownloads” folderintheUSB π π ] (UP)buttonintheFile ] (UP)buttonintheFile π π π π π ] (UP)buttonto † † † † ] (BOOK- π π π π † † † † ] Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 181 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s / Operations in the Special Website Special in the Operations π π π π ] ( † † † † π π π π ] (EXECUTE) button, or ] (CLOSE) button. † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π ) button to select the desired bookmark. † † † † / π π π π ] (CANCEL) button to cancel. ] (VIEW) button to open the page of the selected ] ( ] (BOOKMARK) button to call up the Bookmark dis- ] (BOOKMARK) button to call up 23 34 † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π π π π π π π π π ) button. return to the browser, press the [8 return to the browser, register the bookmark, press the [7 register the bookmark, press the † † Press the [2 bookmark. press the [8 Press the [4 Press the [1 To play. To Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the [1 new bookmark by position of the Select the † † 3 2 1 Opening a Bookmarked Page Opening a Bookmarked 5 4 3 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 182 Operations intheSpecialWebsite CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 7 6 4 3 2 5 1 the list. order ofyour bookmarks,aswelldeleteunnecessarybookmarksfrom F Editing Bookmarks rom theBookmarkdisplay, you canchange thenamesandrearrange the Closes theBookmarkdisplay andreturnstothebrowser display. Close Deletes theselectedbookmarkfromBookmarklist. Delete see page73. ton callsupthedisplay forentering characters. For detailson entering characters, Changes theorderofbookmarks. Move Used when registering abookmark(page180). Add Opens thewebpageofselectedbookmark. V Moves theselectionpositioninBookmarklist. π π Changes thenameofselectedbookmark.Pressing[5 Changing names π π 1 3 2 iew / † † † † Select thebookmarkyouwishtomove,thenpress[4 [7 Move thebookmarktoselectedpositionbypressing button. Select theintendedpositionbypressing[1 tion forthebookmark. T (MOVE) button. he lower partofthedisplay changes, lettingyou selectthenewposi- π π π π † † † † ] (EXECUTE)button. 2467 123456 π† π π π π † † † † ] (CHANGE)but- ] ( π π π π / π π π π † † † † † † † † ) ] Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 183 haracters. (Refer to “Entering haracters. Entering Characters input dis- When the character can enter is opened, you play c on page 178.) Characters” CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Operations in the Special Website Special in the Operations ] (EDIT) † † † † π π π π ) button. † † † † ]/[3 / † † † † π π π π π π π π ] ( † † † † π π π π ) button to select the setting or change the 6 † † † † / ] buttons to select the desired display. ] buttons to select 5 π π π π ® ][ ] ( 34 √ ] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting dis- to call up the Internet Setting ] (SETTING) button † † † † π π † † π π † † call up the relevant Edit display, press the [2 call up the relevant Edit display, his can also be done by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. ENTRY] using the [DATA his can also be done by or some items, the Edit display may not be shown, but the setting or change but the setting or change shown, not be may or some items, the Edit display Press the [2 value. T To button. F be executed. may Press the [5 play. [ Press the TAB item by pressing the [1 Select the desired rom the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the related to the settings can make various you Settings display, rom the Internet 5 4 3 2 1 Basic Operation F Internet The the menus and displays. preferences for including Internet connection, Others. LAN, and Wireless LAN, Browser, sub-displays: has four Settings display About the Internet Settings Display Settings the Internet About Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 184 Operations intheSpecialWebsite CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 7 6 Both thewiredLANandwirelessneedtobesetinthisdisplay. LAN Browser 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 T T to on.Imagedataisnotshown when thisissettooff. Image dataandpicturesinthewebpageareshown inthebrowser when thisisset Show images Restores thehomepagesetting. Restore DefaultHome w address, subnetmask,andgateway server address. These settingsmustbemade T IP address/Subnetmask/Gateway ally)” or“OFF.” settings mustbemadewhen “UseDHCP”above issetto“ON(setDNSmanu- T 2 1/DNSserver DNS server select “ON.” Determines whether ornotDHCPisused.Ifyour routeriscompatiblewithDHCP, Use DHCP F Set currentpageasHome Shows andallows editingofthewebpagewhich issetasthehomepage. Home Page Selects thecharacter codeencodingforthebrowser. Encode or details,referto“ChangingtheHomePage” onpage186. press the[3 To press the[7 To To his determinesthetimezonesettingforbrowser. hese settingsareavailable only when DHCP isnotused. The settingshereare:IP hese determinetheaddressesofprimaryandsecondaryDNS servers. These ime zone hen “UseDHCP” above issetto“OFF.” cancel,pressthe[8 executethesetting,press[3 actually applyallsettingschangedintheInternetSettingsdisplay, π π † † π π † † 6 5 4 3 2 1 † † † † ] (CANCEL)button. ] (SAVE) button. π† ] (CANCEL) button. case you have toenterthemagain. Make noteofthesettingshere, awritten in π π π π Gateway Subnet mask IP address DNS server2 DNS server1 Use DHCP ] (ENTER)button.To cancel, Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 185 he settings at left are not neces- he settings at T Wireless using the sary when Game Adaptor. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s

Operations in the Special Website Special in the Operations

SSID Channel Encryption WEP key type WEP key length WEP key Make a written note of the settings here, in a written note of the settings here, Make to enter them again have case you 1 2 3 4 5 ireless Networks hese settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the These is enabled. Encryption above only when hese settings are available Proxy server/Proxy port/Non-proxy server name, port number and the host name for the non- Determines the proxy server When using a proxy server. settings here are only necessary when The proxy server. name. server (comma) between each enter a separator using a non-proxy server, Delete cookies cookies. Deletes the information of all saved Delete all bookmarks bookmarks. Deletes all saved Initialize setup to their defaults. See “Initializ- Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays ing Internet Settings” on page 187. Connection information detailed information on the current connection. Shows W are displayed. Networks Wireless or not Determines whether SSID Determines the SSID setting. Channel Determines the channel. Encryption or not the data is encrypted. Determines whether key WEP key type/WEP key length/WEP T type and length of the encryption key. ireless LAN ireless 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 hese settings here are only necessary when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor. using a USB wireless necessary when here are only hese settings or a wireless LAN setup, make sure to set both the LAN settings (page 184) and the LAN settings sure to set both LAN setup, make or a wireless 3 4 5 1 2 Others the Wireless LAN settings below. LAN settings Wireless the T F W Operations in the Special Website

Changing the Home Page

In the default condition, the top page of the special website is automatically set to be the Home page for the browser. However, you can specify any desired page on the special website to be the Home page.

1 Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page. 2 Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting display.

3 Press the TAB [√] button to select the BROWSER tab.

45 6

4 Press the [1†] (†) button to select the setting “Set current page as Home.”

5 Use the [2π†]/[3π†] (EDIT) buttons to actually set the selected page as your new Home page.

6 To return to the browser, press the [7π†] (SAVE) button. To cancel, press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Connecting the Clavinova

186 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 187 Sometimes cookies contain personal information. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Operations in the Special Website Special in the Operations ) button to select “Initialize.” ) button to select ] (EDIT) buttons to initialize the Internet set- ] (EDIT) buttons to initialize the Internet 4 † † † † † † † † / π π π π π π π π ] button to select the OTHERS tab. ] button to select ] ( 3 ]/ [3 ® ] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Settings dis- to call up the Internet Settings ] (SETTING) button † † † † † † † † † † π π † † π π π π π π Use the [2 tings. Press the [5 play. [ Press the TAB Press the [1 delete the cookies or bookmarks, use the appropriate operations in the delete the cookies or bookmarks, use the appropriate operations

THERS tab display (page 185). THERS tab display Delete cookies/bookmarks Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize operation above. To O he settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize using when are not initialized of the Internet function he settings 4 3 2 1 T as initialized separately, settings must be instrument; Internet of the operation only the settings of not will reset to the default values explained here. Initializing made in the Internet Settings displays have but also all settings you the browser, related to Internet connec- and bookmarks), including those (except for the cookies tion. Initializing Internet Settings Internet Initializing Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 188 Glossary ofInternetTermsGlossary ofInternetTermsGlossary Converter orBridge) (Wireless Ethernet Adaptor W W W URL Subnet mask SSL SSID Site Server Router Proxy Provider NTP Modem Link LAN IP address Internet Home page Gateway Download DNS DHCP Cookie Browser Broadband CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual eb page ireless Game ireless LAN nected betweenamodemandcomputer, althoughsomemodemshave abuilt-inrouter. computers inahouseoroffice, andallow themtoallaccesstheInternetandsharedata. A routerisusuallycon- A deviceforconnectingmultiplecomputernetworks. For example,arouterisnecessarywhen connectingseveral speed, andtofilter requests,usually forsecurityandtoprevent unauthorizedaccesstoaninternalnetwork. itself. Ifnot,itforwards therequesttorealserver. Proxyservers areusedtoimprove performanceand tion ontheInternet.Itintercepts allordesignatedrequeststotherealserver toseeifitcanfulfill therequests A proxyserver isaserver thatallcomputersonalocalnetwork have togothroughbeforeaccessinginforma- F Short forNetwork Time Protocol,astandardforsettingtheinternalsystemclock ofthecomputerover anetwork. converts thedigitalsignalsfromcomputertoanalogaudioforsendingover thephoneline,andviceversa. A devicewhich connects andallows datatransfer betweenaconventional telephonelineandacomputer. It machines, etc.equippedwithLANports. Device thatallowseasywireless connectionwithdigitalconsumerelectronicdevices,printers, and game tion ofwebpageswhose addressesbeginwith“http://www.yamaha.com/” isreferred to asthe Yamaha site. Short for“website,” thisreferstothegroupofwebpagesthatareopenedtogether. For example,thecollec- A LAN connection that allows datatransferthrough awireless,cable-freeconnection. A LANconnectionthatallows Refers toeach individual pagethatmakesupawebsite. pages ontheInternet. “http://.”A completeURLusuallystartswiththecharacters Locator,Short forUniformResource websites and astringofcharacters usedtoidentifyandlink tospecific intoseveralA settingusedtodividealarge-scalenetwork smallernetworks. ov Short forSecureSocketsLayer, datasuchascreditcardnumbers astandardfortransmittingconfidential SSIDnames. nication ispossibleonlybetweenterminalswithmatching T andservices. pointforanetwork,providingA hardware accesstofiles systemorcomputerusedasacentral necessary tocontractaprovider. A communicationsbusinessthatoffersInternetconnectionservices.InordertoconnecttheInternet,itis web page. link. thepageselectionjumpstorelevant When theplacewithlinkisclicked, strings ona Location informationinothersentencesandimages,etc.thatareunderbuttonscharacter orhome)bylocation (such meansofaspecialcable. asanoffice Short forLocal Area Network,thisisadata-transfernetworkthat connectsagroupofcomputersatsingle on thenetwork. andindicatingthedevice’s computer connectedtoanetwork, A stringofnumbersassignedtoeach location mobile phonesandotherdevices. among computers, high-speeddatatransfer theInternetallows A hugenetworkmadeupofnetworks, mean the“frontscreen”ortoppageofawebsite. T despite differingcommunicationsstandards. andconversionA systemwhich orsystems,andmakespossibledatatransfer linksdifferentnetworks Songand otherdatafromawebsitetotheinstrument. instrument, thisreferstotheprocessoftransferring other localstoragedevice—muchlikecopying fromyour files harddiskdrive toafloppy disk.For this Tr totheircorrespondingIPaddresses. A systemthattranslatesnamesofcomputersconnectedtoanetwork timeconnectionismadetotheInternet. can bedynamically andautomaticallyassignedeach T each timeyou visitthesite. certain informationsuchasyour usernameandpassword, soyou don’t have tore-entertheinformation net. The inaconventional inthatit“remembers” computerprogram, functionissimilartoapreferencefile when visitingawebsiteandusingtheInter- A systemthatrecordscertaininformationtheusertransfers that showsthecontentsofwebpages. T v (suchas An Internetconnectiontechnology/service thatallowsforhigh-speed,high- ADSL andopticalfiber) or thisinstrument,theinternalclock ofthecomputeris usedtospecifythevalid time/dateforcookiesandSSL. olume datacommunication. his is an identification name for specifying a particular network over awirelessLANconnection.Commu- nameforspecifyingaparticularnetwork his isanidentification he firstpageshownwhen openingabrowserandconnectingtotheInternet. This phrase isalsousedto whichhis isastandardorprotocolby network IPaddressesandotherlow-level configuration information he software usedto search for, access,andviewwebpages.For thisinstrument,referstothedisplay ansferring dataover anetwork,fromlarger“host”systemtosmaller“client”system’s harddrive or er theInternet. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CAUTION Connecting Audio & Video Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Devices (345) Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, elec- n trical shock or damage to the components may occur. Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance.

Using External Audio Devices for play-

INPUT MIC. 3 VOLUME LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES back and Recording ( [AUX OUT] MIN MAX Jacks, [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks)

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound or to a cassette tape recorder or a digital audio device for recording your performance. The microphone or guitar sound con- 2 1 nected to the instrument’s [MIC./LINE IN] jack) is output at the same time. Refer to the diagrams below and use audio cables for connection. These jacks are located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument. Using Headphones (1 [PHONES] jacks) CAUTION Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] When the instrument’s sound is output to an external jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the leftward device, ﬁrst turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the underside of the instrument. For details, see page 17. power off. Do not route the output from the [AUX OUT] [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] jacks to the [AUX IN] jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jacks is output from the [AUX OUT] [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] Connecting a Microphone or jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop Guitar (2 [MIC./LINE IN] jack) that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage both pieces of equipment. By connecting a microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack (standard 1/4" phone jack) located on the left underside of the instrument, you can enjoy singing along with Song playback (KARAOKE) or with your own perfor- [AUX OUT] Jacks mance. The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar (Standard phone jacks of [L/L+R] and [R]) sounds through the built-in speakers. For instructions on When these are connected, you can use the instru- connecting, see page 54. Please note that when con- ment’s [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the vol- necting devices of high output level, make sure to set ume of the sound output to the external device. the [MIC. LINE] switch to “LINE.” Connect the instrument’s AUX OUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using The right side of the instrument appropriate audio cables. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for (near the higher keys) connection with a monaural device.

P. 191 P. 194 P. 194 P. 195 Instrument Powered speakers 6 7 8 9

The front side of the instru- Input jack ment (the keyboard side) Phone plug (standard) Phone plug Using Your Instrument with Other Devices (standard) Audio cable

5 4 3 ) P. 190 P. 190P. 189 P. 196

The left side of the instrument (near the lower keys)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 189 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 190 •T •U n priate audiocables. the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R]jacks usingappro- external synthesizerorthetonegenerator moduleand ers. Connecttheoutputjacks (LINEOUTetc.)ofan instrument tobereproducedviatheinstrument’s speak- nected tothesejacks, allowing thesoundofanexternal T Built-in Speakers( Playing ExternalAudioDeviceswiththe priate audiocables. A ment’s AUX OUT[L]/[R](LEVELFIXED)jacks andthe sound toanexternalaudiosystem.Connecttheinstru- external audiosystem,orrecordingtheinstrument’s trol setting.Usethesewhen controllingvolume withan ﬁxed level, regardlessofthe [MASTER VOLUME] con- FIXED), thesoundisoutputtoexternaldeviceata When theseareconnected(withRCA pinplug;LEVEL (RCA pinjacks of[L]and[R]) [AUX OUT(LEVELFIXED)]Jacks Connecting Audio&Video Devices he stereooutputsfromanotherinstrumentcanbecon- the poweroff. then totheinstrument.Reversethisorderwhenyouturn instrument, ﬁrstturnonthepowertoexternaldevice, When thesoundofanexternaldeviceisoutputto UX INjacks ofanexternalaudiosystemusingappro- signal fromthe[AUX IN]jacks. CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual he instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] settingaffectstheinput se onlythe[L/L+R]jack forconnectionwithamonauraldevice. CAUTION Instrument Instrument Phone plug(standard) A Pin plug udio cable A 4 udio cable [AUXIN]Jacks)

Stereo system T Synthesizer one generator one generator Pin plug Pin plug page 56. video, computer. For instructionsonconnecting,see (for groupsing-alongsandthelike)displayed onthe TV, can have thecurrentdisplay contents,lyricsortextfiles Connect theinstrumenttoanexternalmonitor, andyou T ( tents onanExternalMonitor Showing theInstrument’s Display Con- 5 erminal) 2 1 Settings •A • n •W • Set theNTSCorPAL tocorrespondthestandardusedby Set theRGBtocomputermonitor. called upontheinstrument. via VIDEO OUT/RGBOUT, regardlessofthedisplay thatis Out signal,onlythelyricsofsongortextfilesareoutput y distant objectstoavoid eyestrain. y for prolongedperiodsoftimesincedoingsocoulddamage [VIDEOOUT]Terminal, [RGBOUT] our videoequipment. our eyesight. Take frequentbreaksandfocusyour eyes on v hen LYRICS/TEXT isselectedasthecontents oftheScreen oid lookingatthetelevision,video,orcomputermonitor [1 “NTSC”, “PAL”, or“RGB”byusingthe Select thevideoequipmentstandard [FUNCTION] Call uptheoperationdisplay. SCREEN OUT buttons. text (TEXT)—byusingthe[3 display contents(LCD)orlyrics(LYRICS)/ tents oftheScreenOutsignal—thecurrent π π π π † † † † ]/ [2 π π π π → † † † † [J](UTILITY) ] buttons.Selectthecon- → π π π π T AB [ † † † † ]/[4 √ ][ π π π π ® † † † † ] ] Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 191 ] buttons to set the ] buttons to set the CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s † † † † π π π π ]–[8 ] button to select the functions to select the functions ] button to † † † † † † † † π π π π π π π π When you use a pedal to switch Registration MemoryWhen you use a pedal settings (page 134), these settings are invalid. he available parameters differ depending on the differ depending on the parameters he available be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2. be assigned to the functions are listed below. Details on the pedal Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the buttons to select Use the [A]/[B] pedal, to or the AUX-connected three pedals function is to be assigned. which the Use the [1 Use the [2 function is controllable Check that the desired pressing the pedal. with the pedal by actually details of the selected functions. details of the selected T 3. Details on the parameters function selected in step below. are given edal on/off operation may differ depending on the partic- edal on/off operation may Set the polarity of the pedal P exam- connected to the instrument. For ular pedal you’ve selected turn the ple, pressing down on one pedal may make/brand pressing a different function on, while of use this set- turn the function off. If necessary, pedal may PEDAL ting to reverse the control. Press the [I] (AUX the polarity. POLARITY) button to switch 2 3 4 5 n Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack) PEDAL] ([AUX Foot Controller or the Footswitch Using ] √ AB [ T → oot Controller FC7 F (optional) [D] CONTROLLER ootswitch FC5 ootswitch → F (optional) Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] PEDAL PEDAL [AUX PEDAL] jack) PEDAL] jack) [AUX CAUTION ootswitch FC4 ootswitch er various user-assignable functions. For example, For functions. user-assignable er various oot Pedals 6 F (optional) Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal the power is off. olume control function allows you to add expression to you allows olume control function F 1 In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three or foot controller, In addition to the footswitch piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right, Center func- and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various the related explanations cover following The tions here. and assignable functions (parameters). operations Assigning Specific Functions to Each Assigning Specific Functions Foot Pedal to your performance by controlling the volume level of level the volume controlling by performance to your the FC4 or FC5 connecting Or by play. the notes you start/ and assigning it to the Style playback footswitch with your can start and stop the Style stop function, you pedal has the same function as foot. (In this case, the The button.) [START/STOP] the panel STYLE CONTROL instructions the are listed following assignable functions below. By connecting a Foot Controller or Footswitch to the Controller or Footswitch By connecting a Foot control convenient have can you jack, PEDAL] [AUX ov it the controller FC7 and assigning connecting the Foot v Using the Footswitch or Foot or Foot the Footswitch Using Controller ( Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 192 Assignable PedalFunctions Details onthepedalfunctionsarelistedhere.For functionsindicatedwith“ Using theFootswitchorFootController([AUXPEDAL]jack) operation cannotbedonewithafootswitch. SYNCHRO STOP SYNCHRO START T STYLE START/STOP SONG PLAY/PAUSE TEXT PAGE– TEXT PAGE+ L L SCORE PAGE– SCORE PAGE+ T VOCAL HARMONY HARMONY/ECHO VIBE ROTORON/OFF DSP VARIATION S.ART SW MOD/S.ART2 (ALT) MOD/S.ART1* PITCH BEND* PORTAMENTO GLIDE SOFT SOSTENUTO SUSTAIN VOLUME* YRICS PAGE– YRICS PAGE+ CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual AP TEMPO ALK for thepedalconnectedtoinstrument’s AUX PEDAL jack. Allows you touseafootcontrollercontrolthevolume. This functionisavailable only While the song is stopped, you canturntothenextscorepage. While thesongisstopped,you Switches theMICSETTING Talk functiononandoff. Switches the Vocal Harmony functiononandoff. Switches theHARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect onandoff. selected. Switches the VIBRATE SWparameteronandoffwhenthe VIBE VIBRATE effecttypeis Switches Voice EffectDSP VARIATION onandoff. function on/offforeachkeyboardpartonthisdisplay. s When you useaS. Articulation voice thathasaneffectassignedtothepedal/foot- this display. pedal/footswitch ispressed. You keyboardparton canturnthisfunctionon/offforeach pedal/footswitch. The effects(waveform) timethe isalternatelyturnedonandoffeach As avariation onMOD/S.ART1,theeffects(waveform) canbeswitched on/offby the this display. ing down thefootcontroller. You keyboardparton can turnthisfunctionon/offforeach be addedtotheS. Articulation Voice78). (page The press- effectbecomesdeeperwhen Applies avibratoeffecttonotesplayed onthekeyboard.Moreover, various effectscan Allows you tobendthepitchofnotesupordownby usingthepedal. w 90). from theMixingConsole(page This functiondoesnotaffectcertainNatural Voices, played while thepreceding noteisstillheld).Portamento Time canalsobeadjusted is pressed.Portamento isproducedwhennotesareplayed legatostyle(i.e.,anoteis T the pedalisreleased. when changes, When thepedalispressed,pitch andthenreturnstonormalpitch appropriate Voices. play.ume andchanges thetimbreofnotesyou This iseffective onlyforcertain Allows you touseapedalcontroltheSofteffect.Pressingthisreducesvol- forexample,whileothernotesareplayedmakes itpossibletosustainachord, staccato. tain aslongthepedalisheld.However, allsubsequentnoteswillnotsustain. This c ifyou playAllows you tousethepedalasasostenutopedal.Inotherwords, anoteor ately stops(damps)anysustainednotes. all notesplayed onthekeyboardhave alongersustain.Releasingthepedalimmedi- Allows you touseapedalcontrolthesustain.Whenyou pressandholdthepedal, Same asthe[SYNCSTOP] button. Same asthe[SYNCSTART] button. Same asthe[TAP TEMPO] button. Same astheSTYLECONTROL[START/STOP] button. Same astheSONG[PLAY/PAUSE] button. Y Y canreturntothelastlyricspage. While thesongisstopped,you canturntothenextlyricspage. While thesongisstopped,you canturntothepreviousscorepage. While thesongisstopped,you witch, you pressingthepedal/footswitch. canenabletheeffectby You canturnthis ou canreturntothelasttextpage. ou canturntothenexttextpage. hord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holdingthenote(s),noteswillsus- hord onthekeyboardandpresspedalwhile he portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while thepedal he portamentoeffect(asmoothslidebetweennotes)canbeproducedwhile hich would notsoundappropriatelywiththisfunction. * “, useonlythefootcontroller;proper Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 193 ] buttons. You You ] buttons. π† ]–[8 π† CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Pitch Bend Range (page Pitch 90) set-

→ ], and their availability depends on the selected control ], and their availability Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack) PEDAL] ([AUX Foot Controller or the Footswitch Using π† ]–[8 π† hese specify the part(s) that will be affected byhese specify the part(s) that will be affected the pedal. he pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page between the Fingered he pedal alternately switches 107). instrument selected by a percussion the [4 he pedal plays hange, in semitones. Linked to the Mixing Console hord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,” FULL KEYBOARD,” If the fingering is set to “AI during Style playback. hord is changed ou can specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper or soft ou can specify how far down you aised or lowered. Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the the Main section of the button is automatically followed by a fill-in, which Plays Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the the Main section of followed is automatically by a fill-in, which Plays ting. When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch the pedal when change, is released. drum kits are shownWhen PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available here, select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. letting you When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the This are shown here. above) pedal. T Y effect (page 192) starts working. Determines the depth of the pedal effect. When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether is change the pitch r When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch c When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch the pedal when change, is pressed. Same as the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button. Same as the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button. Same as the PART Setting. Touch Calls up the next One Setting. Touch Calls up the previous One Plays a break. a Plays immediate right. I–III] buttons. Same as the [ENDING/rit. function on and off. Out In /Fade Fade Switches T Style bass note will be held evenAccompaniment the While the pedal is pressed, if the c the function does not work. T Same as the [INTRO I–III] buttons. [INTRO I–III] buttons. Same as the buttons. A–D] VARIATION [MAIN Same as the left. immediate a fill-in. Plays can use the keyboard to select the desired percussioncan use the keyboard to select the desired instrument. The Sostenuto and Portament functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices, even they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals. not affect the Organ Flute Voices, The Sostenuto and Portament functions will ADE IN/OUT he parameters below correspond to buttons [2 below he parameters PERCUSSION KIT ON SPEED OFF SPEED RANGE DEPTH UP/DOWN HALF PEDAL POINT* SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT, RIGHT1, SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT, RIGHT2 OTS– SPLIT ON/OFF OTS+ PERCUSSION DUAL ON/OFF BASS HOLD F BASS FINGERED/FING ON FILL UP ENDING1–3 FILL SELF FILL BREAK MAIN A–D FILL DOWN INTRO1–3 Adjustable Parameters for Each Function Adjustable Parameters for Each T n type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT,” “RIGHT 1,” “RIGHT 2” 1,” “RIGHT POINT,” “HALF PEDAL is selected as the type, the parameters if SUSTAIN example, type. For display. and “LEFT” automatically appear in the Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 194 • terminal andconnectiontothe[MIDI]terminal. two connections:connectiontothe[USB TO HOST] T (page 4). puter andtheinstrument.Refertoseparate InstallationGuide device. You needtoinstallaUSB-MIDI driver toconnectthecom- the computer’s operating systemandaconnectedhardware A driver issoftware thatprovides adata-transfer interfacebetween Driver n r mend thatyou connectthecomputerandinstrumentby USB, If you areusingacomputerthathasUSBinterface,werecom- n the terminals. T MIDI driver. mind thatyou alsoneedtoinstallanappropriateUSB- tage ofsophisticatedcomputermusicprograms. Keep in instrument andthecomputerviaMIDI,takeadvan- [MIDI] terminals,you cantransfer databetweenthe By connectingacomputertothe[USB TO HOST]or ( Connecting aComputer Device, orInternet( Connecting aComputer, USB • •W •W tively useit,refertothefollowing sections: F cables toconnectexternalMIDIdevices. Use thebuilt-in[MIDI]terminalsandstandardMIDI Devices ( Connecting ExternalMIDI Connecting externalMIDIdevices([MIDI]terminals)/ConnectingaComputerorUSBDevice ather thanby MIDI. MIDI THRU MIDI OUT MIDI IN or ageneral overview ofMIDIandhow you caneffec- his explanationisdivided into two parts,covering the he instructionsbelow explain how toconnectanduse 7 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual install theUSB-MIDIdriver. instrument totheUSBterminalofcomputer. Then, to connectthe[USB TO HOST]terminalonthe USB, useastandardUSBcable(having theUSBlogo) When connectingtheinstrumenttocomputervia Connecting tothe[USBTOHOST]terminal 200 MIDI Settings...... page

hat You CanDo 199 With MIDI...... page 196 hat isMIDI?...... page [MIDI] and Instrument MIDI device. Receives MIDImessagesfromanexternal MIDI IN. Simply relays theMIDImessagesreceived at instrument. Tr ansmits MIDI messages generated by the ansmits MIDImessagesgenerated 7 8 [MIDI]Terminals)

[USB TOHOST]Terminals) USB cable 789) ) •F •W nations onthe[USB TO DEVICE] terminalfollow inthenextsection. Be carefultoconnecttheproperplugindirection.Expla- the two terminalsandthecorrespondingcableconnectors. [USB TO HOST]and[USB TO DEVICE]. Take carenottoconfuse T About the[USBTOHOST]andDEVICE]terminals n • •T n here aretwo differenttypesofUSBterminalsontheinstrument: •W • • • instrument offandrestartthecomputer. computer ortheinstrumentfreezes,turnpower tothe risks freezingthecomputerandcorruptingorlosingdata.If nal, makesuretoobserve thefollowing points.Failing todoso When connectingthecomputerto[USB TO HOST]termi- Precautions whenusingthe[USBTOHOST]terminal the owner’s manualoftherelevant software. through aUSBhub. computer, maketheconnectiondirectlywithoutpassing USB connectionismade. the instrumenttoMIDIINterminalofinterface. instrument, andconnectthe[MIDIOUT]terminalof computer interfacetothe[MIDIIN]terminalof y to acomputer. Ifyou have aMIDIinterfacebuiltinto T Connection by[MIDI]terminals or informationonsettingupyour sequencesoftware, referto he instrumentwillbegintransmission ashorttimeafterthe Execute thefollowing beforeturningthepower totheinstru- Before connectingthecomputerto[USB TO HOST]ter- Use an AB typeUSBcableoflessthanabout3meters. connecting theUSBcable. off thenonagain,orwhenalternatelyconnecting/dis- operations: Whenturningthepowerofinstrument should waitforsixsecondsormorebetweenthese -M - computer. ment offorunpluggingtheUSBcableto/frominstrument/ cation software, alsoturnsoffthepower totheinstrument. (such assuspended,sleep,standby), andquitany openappli- minal, exitfromany power-saving modeofthecomputer our computer, connecttheMIDIOUTterminalof here aretwo ways toconnecttheinstrumentviaMIDI hen usingaUSBcabletoconnecttheinstrumentyour the keyboardorplaying back asong.) instrument. (Dataistransmitted onlyby playing noteson CAUTION Quit any openapplicationsoftware onthecomputer. hile aUSBdeviceisconnectedtotheinstrument,you ake surethatdataisnotbeingtransmitted fromthe Instrument terminal [MIDI OUT] terminal [MIDI IN] MIDI cable terminal [MIDI OUT] terminal [MIDI IN] interface installed Computer withMIDI Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 195 ] MEDIA USB storage device USB storage USB storage device USB storage ® ][ √ USB TO DEVICE terminal TO USB AB [ CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s T → Instrument Instrument Connecting a Computer or USB Device a Computer Connecting [J] UTILITY [J] UTILITY → Computer Computer Backing up the instrument data to a computer Backing up the instrument data to a CAUTION Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and device Disconnect the USB storage connect it to the computer up data to a computer and organizing files/folders Backing Saves internal device. data to a USB storage Saves or details, see page 68. page or details, see Backing up your data to a computer ■ data to a USB storage can you device, saved Once you’ve then the data to the hard disk of your computer, copy and organize the files as desired. Simply recon- archive nect the device as shown below. Formatting USB storage media Formatting USB storage F media completely erases all Formatting a USB storage storage media data on the media. Make sure that the USB data! you’re formatting does not contain important ou can check this in the display called up by the following oper- the following by called up in the display this ou can check Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and this display the [A]/[B] buttons in using by Select the device press [F] (PROPERTY). Checking remaining memoryChecking remaining device on the USB storage Y ation: [FUNCTION] n HOST] terminal TO to the [USB with a computer connected Even DEVICE] ter- TO to the [USB device connected and a USB storage from the com- device cannot access the USB storage minal, you puter via the instrument. n USB port or serial port (modem or printer terminal) Computer MIDI interface ] simultaneously from ® MIDI cable ] and [ [MIDI IN] terminal [MIDI OUT] terminal √ Instrument Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable. After that, exit once from the selection display then return to the display (or press the Tab switch buttons [ the selection display). The USB tabs (USB 1, USB 2, etc.) are automatically called up, allowing you to save files and play back music data from the devices. ou’ve created to the connected device, as well as created to ou’ve via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal) he second connection possibility involves a separate, a separate, involves connection possibility he second By connecting the USB-type LAN adaptor, you can you By connecting the USB-type LAN adaptor, for down- directly access special Internet websites 176). loading music data (page storage By connecting the instrument to a USB data can save device with a standard USB cable, you y read data from the connected device. T via a to the computer interface connected external MIDI or printer terminal). a serial port (modem USB port or ter- the MIDI OUT MIDI cables, connect Using standard to the [MIDI IN] terminal external interface minal of the connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument, and MIDI IN terminal of the interface. of the instrument to the 9 his type is used to connect the instrument to a USB here are two ways of using the [USB TO DEVICE] ter- TO of using the [USB ways here are two here are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: different types of USB terminals on the here are two 2 1 Using USB Storage Devices T cre- data you’ve to save you allows device, and storage ated to the connected device, as well as read data from description gener- following The the connected device. to connect and use them. ally explains about how device, be sure to read Before using a USB storage (USB Flash Mem- Device “Handling the USB Storage Disk, etc)” on page 22. ory/Floppy About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] T care not to confuse Take DEVICE]. TO HOST] and [USB TO [USB terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. the two direction. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper HOST] terminal can be found in the TO Explanations on the [USB previous section. n ■ T minal. ■ ( Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer. MIDI interface for your Make sure to use the appropriate Adaptor Connecting to a USB-type LAN and USB Storage Device n Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 196 See page176forinstructionsonconnecting. net websites,anddownload song data, etc. the bottomleftofinstrument)toaccessspecialInter- T Connect totheInternet( Connecting aComputerorUSBDevice here arethreeways tousethe[LAN]port(locatedon CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual data ontheinstrument. backDEVICE] terminaloftheinstrument,andplay the copied thedata,connectdeviceto[USB TO device fromtheharddiskofcomputer. Onceyou’ve ated onotherdevicescanbecopiedtoaUSBstorage cre- andStyleFile-formatted Stylefiles Standard MIDIfiles createdontheinstrumentitselfbutalso Not onlyfiles instrument. storage media,thenconnecting/inserting themediato transferred firstcopying totheinstrumentby themtothe F USB storagedevice Copying filesfromacomputerharddiskto iles containedontheharddiskofacomputercanbe Reading filesontheUSBstorage device fromtheinstrument storage device Copying thefilesofharddiskcomputertoUSB Computer Computer Instrument Instrument [USB TO DEVICE]terminal connect ittotheinstrument device fromthecomputeran Disconnect theUSBstorage ) USB storage device USB storage device [LAN]Port) d sound. body resonates the Pluck astringandthe the piano,andyour speakersreproducethem. sary, sincetherecordingcontainsactualsoundsof actual pianoperformance. The pianoitselfisnotneces- back thatCDonyour audiosystem,you can hear the audio data,andthisisrecordedtoCD. When you play pianist’s performancearecapturedintherecordingas In theabove example,theactualacousticsoundsof the is calledaudiodata,todistinguishitfromMIDIdata. sound (vibration inair)oftheacousticinstrument. This ple, asolopianorecording),you’re hearingtheactual recording. When you play back amusicCD(forexam- Now, let’s examinewhat happenswhen weplayback a the keyboard. circuit) isplayed basedoninformationreceived from note) storedinthetonegenerator section(electronic instrument thesamplingnote(previouslyrecorded As shown intheillustration above, inanelectronic note? But how doesadigitalinstrumentgoaboutplaying a tar, you directlypluck astringandthenotesounds. inside hitssomestringsandplays anote. With thegui- tar. With thepiano,you strikeakey, andahammer instruments, such asagrand pianoandaclassicalgui- idea ofwhat MIDIdoes,let’s firstconsideracoustic tal musicinstrumentsandotherdevices. To getabetter easy andcomprehensive controlamongelectronic/digi- Put simply, MIDIisadatatransfer standardthatallows What isMIDI? production Acoustic guitarnote eodn Playback Recording acoustic instrument(audiodata) Recording andplaying back theperformance ofan duction Digital instrumentnotepro- is played through thespeakers. note storedinthetonegenerator from thekeyboard, asampling Based onplaying information L Internal amp Internal Playing thekey board (Electric circuit) (Electric T one generator Internal amp Internal R Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 197 iming expressed 60 (C3) T numerically (quarter note) 120 (strong) 01 (grand piano) 01 (grand CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s Connecting a Computer or USB Device/What is MIDI or USB Device/What a Computer Connecting he amount of data is much less. he amount of data is much to the point and easily edited, even he data can be effectively oice number (with what voice) elocity of changing voices and transforming the data. and transforming voices of changing he instrument is an electronic instrument that can han- 16 instruments his is usually expressed as “it can play he instrument can control a MIDI device by transmit- by he instrument can control a MIDI device inally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets look at the actual data we’ll take a inally, parts. oices specified for the various anel operations on the instrument, such as playing the as playing instrument, such on the anel operations V Note number (with which key) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) V (strength at which it was played) T for (or reception of 32 channels dle 16 MIDI channels using the [USB] terminal). MIDI data reception when T informa- Channel messages transmit at the same time.” Change, for each Program as Note ON/OFF, tion such of the 16 channels. n audio data: over advantages MIDI data has the following •T •T Chan- groups: into two MIDI messages can be divided nel messages and System messages. Channel Messages F the basis for playing as the and that serves recorded a “C” quarter play you say let’s example, sounds. For the instrument’s piano sound on the grand note using out a instrument that puts Unlike an acoustic keyboard. electronic instrument puts out infor- resonated note, the voice,” “with what as such mation from the keyboard it was “when strong,” “about how key,” “with which piece each Then it released.” was pressed” and “when and sent number value into a of information is changed basis Using these numbers as a to the tone generator. the plays the tone generator for sound generation, stored sampled note. Data Example Keyboard P are processed and keyboard and selecting voices, auto accompaniment Styles The stored as MIDI data. and Songs also consist of MIDI data. that stands for Musical Instrument MIDI is an acronym electronic musical allows Digital Interface, which send- by other, instruments to communicate with each compatible Note, Control Change, ing and receiving other types of MIDI data, Change and various Program or messages. T types of controller ting note related data and various incoming instrument can be controlled by The data. the tone automatically determine MIDI messages which and voices mode, select MIDI channels, generator the and of course play values parameter effects, change v Sequencer one Generator T USB storage USB storage device Sequencer USB storage USB storage device one generator T yboard performance (MIDI data) yboard performance Ke the relation of the sequencer and the tone genera- y, Recording Playback Recording and play back the performance of a digital of a digital the performance back and play Recording (MIDI data) instrument he “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration in the illustration he “controller” and “tone generator” Controller (keyboard, etc.) Controller (keyboard, tor is similar to that of the pianist and the piano—one Since digital instruments handle play- the other. plays we can data and the actual sounds independently, back another instru- by hear our piano performance played as guitar or violin. ment, such Even though it is a single musical instrument, the instrument can Even electronic components: a con- be thought of as containing several and a sequencer. a tone generator, troller, n However, we also need a sound source to produce the we also need a sound source However, The speakers. comes from your eventually audio, which The this function. of the instrument fills tone generator the sequencer, recorded performance is reproduced by the song data, using a tone generator back playing instrument various producing capable of accurately sounds—including that of a piano. Looked at in another wa T to the piano in our acoustic exam- are equivalent above is performance on the keyboard ple. Here, the player’s In below). captured as MIDI song data (see illustration on an acoustic order to record the audio performance needed. How- piano, special recording equipment is sequencer since the instrument features a built-in ever, record performance data, this recording that lets you digital instru- Instead, your equipment is unnecessary. to both record and you ment—the Clavinova—allows the data. back play n are sent In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals OUT]) on the instrument. as [AUX (such through output jacks Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 198 below). ted simultaneously, includingtheStyledata(asshown F connected by MIDI. T n instrument. sound accordingtothedatasentby thetransmitting the Transmit Channel,the receiving instrumentwill ment’s MIDIchannel (MIDIReceive Channel)matches cable tothereceiving instrument.Ifthereceiving instru- c mitting instrumentsendsMIDIdataonaspecific MIDI MIDI operates onthesamebasicprinciple. The trans- the appropriatechannel towatch thedesiredprogram. simultaneously fromseveral TV stationsandyou select Y station transmits itsbroadcastsover aspecificchannel. T simultaneously sentover oneMIDIcable. mance dataforsixteendifferentinstrumentpartscanbe MIDI channels. Usingthesechannels, 1–16,theperfor- MIDI performancedataisassignedtooneofsixteen MIDI Channels data. T n What isMIDI? MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive MIDI channel2 MIDI Transmit channel2 Control Change Program Change Note ON/OFF Message Name he instrument’s keyboardandinternaltonegenerator arealso he performancedataofallSongsandStylesishandledasMIDI or example,several partsorchannels canbetransmit- our home TV set receives many differentprograms hannel (MIDI Transmit Channel) viaasingleMIDI hink oftheMIDIchannels as TV channels. Each TV CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 1 W eather report → LOCAL CONTROL ( etc. V tings) c F played. v w ber which correspondstothekey notenum- sage includesaspecific the keyboardisplayed. Each mes- Messages which aregeneratedwhen Operation/Panel Setting or selecting Voices (withcontrol alue basedonhowhardthekeyis hange bankselectMSB/LSBset- olume, panpot(MixingConsole), hich ispressed,plusavelocity 2 cable MIDI NEWS page 202 NEWS ) 2 mentation Chartintheseparate DataList. are shown intheMIDIDataFormat andMIDIImple- T device. turer andRealtimemessagesforcontrollingtheMIDI transferring datauniquetoeach instrument manufac- system. These includeSystemExclusive messagesfor T System Messages received dataisplayed back (page203). T MIDI data(page 202). to besentover which MIDIchannel when transmitting As you cansee,itisessentialtodeterminewhich datais nal sequencer niment (Styleplayback) soundoftheinstrumenttoanexter- Example: Recording aperformance withtheautoaccompa- Realtime Messages Message Operation/PanelSetting System Exclusive Message Name he messagestransmitted/received by theinstrument his isdatathatusedincommonby theentireMIDI he instrumentalsoallows you todeterminehow the STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument LEFT RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1 Clavinova track (channnel) Start/stop operation Clock setting, etc. Effect typesettings(MixingConsole), MIDI cable Channel 11 Channel 10 Channel 9 Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1 External sequencer External Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac Trac k 11 k 10 k 9 k 8 k 7 k 6 k 5 k 4 k 3 k 2 k 1 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 199 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s What You Can Do With MIDI With Can Do You What ith MIDI, Voices are assigned to specific numbers, are assigned to specific Voices ith MIDI, GM System Level 1 GM System Level 2 XG Collection) DOC (Disk Orchestra GS XF Style File oice Allocation Format oice Allocation oices may not play back as expected unless the voice unless the voice as expected back not play oices may his is one of the most common voice allocation for- his is one of the most common voice of format is compatible with many allocation his voice he Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard the SMF (Standard XF format enhances Yamaha he auto Yamaha’s combines all of Format he Style File oice parameters, and integrated effect processing. and integrated oice parameters, amaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series devices, including the Clavinova MIDI amaha’s ● T mats. with GM System MIDI devices are compatible Many software. available 1, as is most commercially Level ● that 2” is a standard specification “GM System Level 1” and enhances the original “GM System Level for It provides Song data compatibility. improves selection, expanded greater voice increased polyphony, v ● 1 XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level to specifically Yamaha by developed format, and was as well as greater and variations, Voices more provide and to and effects, Voices control over expressive ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Voices using CVP-409/407 Song data recorded on the in the XG category is XG-compatible. ● T Y instruments. ● the Roland Corporation. by developed GS was XG, GS is a major enhance- Yamaha as In the same way and Voices more to provide ment of the GM specifically as well as greater expres- Drum kits and their variations, and effects. Voices control over sive V W numbering standard The numbers.” called “program to as the “voice allocation) is referred (order of voice allocation format.” V that of the allocation format of the song data matches instru- The compatible MIDI device used for playback. formats. ment is compatible with the following n above, if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions Even completely compatible, depending on the still not be the data may recording meth- specifications of the devices and particular data ods. ● T open- functionality and standard with greater MIDI File) is instrument The for the future. ended expandability containing file an XF lyrics when displaying capable of format (SMF is the most common lyric data is played. instrument is compat- The files. used for MIDI sequence 1, and records “song” data 0 and ible with SMF Formats 0.) using SMF Format ● T format. into a single unified accompaniment know-how Sequencer MIDI receive MIDI transmit Computer or MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI receive Instrument Instrument he CVP-409/407 is compatible with both Format 0 is compatible with both Format he CVP-409/407 is compatible with ESEQ. he CVP-409/407 Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using data (1–16 channels) performance Record your features on an auto accompaniment the instrument’s with sequencer (or computer external sequencer the data with the After recording, edit software). instrument. on the it back then play sequencer, and Format 1. and Format is automati- CVP-409/407 Song data recorded on the 0. as SMF Format cally saved ESEQ SMF (Standard MIDI file) his sequence format is compatible with many of his sequence format is compatible with many his is the most common sequence format. Standard his section covers basic information on data compati- basic information on data his section covers haracteristics, you may be able to play back the data back be able to play may you haracteristics, amaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series devices, including the Clavinova MIDI amaha’s amaha software. ormat 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compati- 1. Many ormat 0 or Format ble with Format 0, and most commercially available available 0, and most commercially ble with Format 0. is recorded as Format software •T • ● T Y is a common format used with various This instruments. Y •T ● T types: as one of two available are generally MIDI Files F Sequence Formats of different Song data is recorded and stored in a variety systems, referred to as “sequence formats.” the sequence format of when is only possible Playback The that of the MIDI device. the Song data matches formats. is compatible with the following CVP-409/407 without any problem, or you may have to perform some have may problem, or you without any back. before the data can be played special operations data, please refer back run into problems playing If you to the information below. MIDI Data Compatibility T or not other MIDI devices can playback bility: whether or not and whether CVP-409/407, the data recorded by available commercially can playback the CVP-409/407 instruments or song data or song data created for other Depending on the MIDI device or data on a computer. c When you want to use the instrument as an XG-com- want When you part set the receive tone generator, patible multi-timbral 1 in 1–16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB for MIDI channels (page 203). MIDI Receive ■ ■ What You Can Do With MIDI Do With Can You What Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 200 3 2 1 Basic Operation → play (calledupby pressing[FUNCTION] USB storage devices,intheMIDISETUPselectiondis- then save alltheseoriginaltemplatesasasinglefile to of your originaltemplatestotheUSERdisplay. You can edit thepre-programmed templatesandsave uptoten lar MIDIapplicationorexternaldevice. Also, you can easily reconfigure theinstrumenttomatch your particu- pre-programmed templatesthatletyou instantlyand the instrument. The instrumentgives you asetoften In thissection,you canmakeMIDI-relatedsettingsfor MIDI Settings MIDI Settings CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual T AB [ To Press the TAB [ them To Function display. Call uptheoperation(MIDItemplateselection) plate. Press oneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaMIDItem- Press the TAB [ display ortoeditthem To template. play. Pressoneofthe[A]–[J]buttonstoselectaMIDI ter. selected template.Hereyou canediteach parame- T ton tocalluptheMIDIdisplayforediting. he individual parameters settingsareshown forthe editatemplate,pressthe[8 usethetemplatesalreadysavedtoUSER ® use thepre-programmedtemplatesortoedit ] SYSTEMRESET). → [I]MIDI ® √ ] buttontoselecttheUSERdisplay. ] buttontoselectthePRESETdis- † † † † ] (EDIT)but- →

[J] UTILITY 6 5 4 display CHORD DETECT BASS display RECEIVE display TRANSMIT display SYSTEM display vant settingdisplay. using theTAB [ Select theUSERtabdisplaytosavedataby display (PRESETorUSER). button toreturntheMIDItemplateselection When you’vefinishedediting,pressthe[EXIT] Use theTAB [ √ √ ]/[ ( playback viaMIDIreceptiondata Settings forthechordtypeStyle 203) tion data(page for Styleplayback viaMIDIrecep- Settings forthebassnoteofchord 203) MIDI ReceptionSettings(page (page 202) MIDI TransmissionSettings MIDI System Settings (page 202) MIDI SystemSettings(page page 204 ][ ® ® ] buttonstocalluptherele- ] buttons(page69). ) Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 201 MIDI Settings MIDI CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s ansmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2,and LEFT), with the excep- ansmits all parts including the keyboard parts his template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit. using a MIDI by the bass part for Style playback his template lets you play hord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit. with hord root in Style playback Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass with the Accord1” above, Basically the same as “MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI left hand on the MIDI with your play notes you note events. connected tone generators feet (especially with your play MIDI pedal units allow you the template lets you play/control This single note bass parts). for playing convenient c T No MIDI signals are sent or received. In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playingIn this setting, the instrument functions as a and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/ sequencer). is used to play This correspond to Song channels are set to channels 1–16. All transmit Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer. (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock of the instru- instead Playback the tempo on wish to set template should be used when you This internal clock. ment’s the MIDI device connected to the instrument. connected tone generators MIDI data and play to transmit MIDI accordions allow you lets you play template This from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. playbackmelodies from the keyboard and control Style with the left- on the instrument hand buttons. Description Tr tion of Song parts. with the exception of how parts are man- keyboard Parts” Basically the same as “All of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead The aged. left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” emplate name MIDI Pedal 2 MIDI OFF MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI Accord 2 MIDI Accord 1 Clock Ext Song Master KBD KBD & STYLE T All Parts Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates MIDI Pre-Programmed Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 202 by setting (page58)isappliedto thenoteevents received Determines whether ornottheinstrument'stranspose ● even ifaSongorStyleisplayed back. to OFF, noMIDIclock orStart/Stopdataistransmitted T ● indicated as“Ext.” intheMaindisplay. an externaldevice(MIDI,USB1or2),the Tempo is ting aMIDIclock signal. When thisissetfor controlby ment’s MIDIINterminal),andthatitisproperlytransmit- external deviceisconnectedproperly(e.g.,totheinstru- MIDI, USB1,or2.Inthiscase,makesurethatthe that device,setthisparameter totheappropriatesetting: or otherMIDIdevice,andyou want tosynchronize itto instrument withanexternalsequencer, MIDIcomputer, keyboard tocontrolexternaldevices.Ifyou areusingthe w an externaldevice.INTERNAL isthenormalClock setting o Determines whether theinstrumentiscontrolledby its ● ■ nal sequencerand/orplay anexternaltonegenerator. use theinstrumentkeyboardtorecordnotesexter- sequencer toplay theinstrument’s internalvoices, and example, thisallows you touseanexternalMIDI w ment’s tonegenerator sectionsothatnosoundisoutput controllers areinternallydisconnectedfromtheinstru- keyboard. Ifyou setLocalto“OFF,” thekeyboardand allowing theinternalvoices tobeplayed directlyfromthe ment controlsitsown (local)internaltonegenerator, Local Controlissetto“ON,” thekeyboardofinstru- T ■ page 200. be calledupinstep4ofthe“BasicOperation” on T MIDI SystemSettings MIDI Settings urns MIDIclock (F8)transmission onoroff. When set urns theLocalControlforeach partonoroff. When he explanationshereapplytotheSYSTEMdisplay to wn internalclock oraMIDIclock signalreceived from hen theinstrumentisbeingusedaloneorasamaster hen you play thekeyboardorusecontrollers.For RECEIVETRANSPOSE TRANSMITCLOCK CLOCK CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual theinstrumentviaMIDI. Clock setting,etc. LOCAL CONTROL SYSTEM display be sent. MIDI dataandover which MIDIchannel thedatawill page 200. This determineswhich partswillbe sentas to becalledupinstep4ofthe“BasicOperation” on T MIDI Transmit Settings equipment onoroff. of MIDIchord exclusive datagenerated by external T exclusive data(chord detect.rootandtype)onoroff. T ● off. sive messagesgenerated by externalequipmentonor MIDI receptionandrecognitionofSystemExclu- tem Exclusive messagesonoroff. The “Rx”settingturns T ● ■ nel(s). briefly whenever any dataistransmitted onthe chan- T ● ON/OFF] button. the on/offstatusof[ACMP from theSplitPoint forthe Voices. This isnotaffectedby T • or 2). board fromtheSplitPoint forthe Voices (RIGHT1and/ T • ● determine thetypesofdatatobesent. w Select theparttobetransmitted andthechannel via Operation messages affectSongorStyleplayback. Determines whether incomingFA (start)andFC(stop) ● he explanationshereapplytothe TRANSMIT display he “Rx”settingturnsMIDIreceptionandrecognition he “Tx”settingturnsMIDItransmission ofMIDIchord he “Tx”settingturnsMIDItransmission ofMIDI Sys- he dotscorrespondingtoeach channel (1–16)flash he keyboardpartplayed ontherightsideofkey- he keyboardpartplayed ontheleft sideofthekeyboard hich theselectedpartwillbetransmitted. You canalso CHORDSYS/EX. SYS/EX. START/STOP LOWER UPPER MESSAGE SW Tx MONITOR already explainedelsewhereinthismanual. configuration ofthepartsissameasthose W ith theexceptionoftwopartsbelow, the TRANSMIT display Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 203 [USB TO [USB TO HOST] jack MIDI Settings MIDI BASS display MIDI/USB 01–16 [MIDI OUT] jack CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407 Owner’s USB2 Port handling USB2 01–16 [USB TO [USB TO HOST] jack Merge USB1 ou can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split specific parameters ou can “lock” Parameter Lock Parameter Y selectable only via the panel point, etc.) to make them controls (page 132). Merge 01–16 MIDI reception MIDI transmission MIDI/USB1 Rx MONITOR MIDI transmission/reception via the USB ter- MIDI transmission/reception minal and MIDI terminals [MIDI IN] jack he dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash (1–16) flash channel to each he dots corresponding he explanations here apply to the BASS display to be display he explanations here apply to the BASS determine the bass note for Style hese settings let you he relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the he relationship between hord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected The hord of Style playback. ● T channel(s). on the is received data any briefly whenever Operation and set the “ON/OFF” for that chan- Select the channel to OFF. All OFF item to set all channels nel. Use the Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback Setting the Bass Note for Style via MIDI Receive T on called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” page 200. T via the note messages received based on playback, at the chan- note on/off messages received The MIDI. nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the c ON/OFF] or split point set- regardless of the [ACMP are simultaneously set to channels When several tings. the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data “ON,” the channels. over received n ■ T can be used for transmitting/ [USB] terminal which 2 ports) of the x (16 channels 32 channels receiving follows: MIDI messages is as RECEIVE display ith the exception of the two parts below, the ith the exception of the two parts below, T (Aftertouch)...... page 164 T (Aftertouch)...... page he received note messages control the instrument’s note messages control the instrument’s he received for receiving parts specially reserved here are five The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection. W configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual. MIDI messages which can be transmitted or MIDI messages which received (recognized) er which MIDI channels the data will be received. MIDI channels er which KEYBOARD T keyboard performance. 1–5 EXTRA PART T these parts are not MIDI data. Normally, and playing instrument can be The the instrument itself. used by by tone generator multi-timbral used as a 32-channel parts parts in addition to the general using these five (except for the microphone sound). Note (Note events)...... page 164 CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ...... page 164 PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)...... page 164 Bend)...... pagePB (Pitch 164 he explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be display he explanations here apply to the RECEIVE MIDI data and parts will receive his determines which he following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANS- on the MIDI messages can be set he following ● ● • • Operation and the part via which to be received Select the channel can also You will be received. the selected channel determine the types of data to be received. T page on called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” 200. T ov MIDI Receive Settings T MIT/RECEIVE display. • • • • •A ■ n Songs About the protected if the proper even cannot be transmitted Write-protected Songs 1–16 are set to be transmitted. Song channels If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, to several is assigned channel transmit If the same to a single channel— messages are merged MIDI the transmitted in the con- possible glitches unexpected sounds and resulting in device. nected MIDI n channel to the same transmit parts are assigned When different Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 204 the BASS display above. T merged MIDIdatareceived over thechannels. neously setto“ON,” thechord typeisdetectedfrom split pointsettings. When several channels aresimulta- will bedetectedregardlessofthe[ACMP ON/OFF]or detected dependonthefingering type. The chord type detecting chords inStyleplayback. The chords tobe nel(s) setto“ON”arerecognizedasthenotesfor MIDI. The noteon/offmessagesreceived atthechan- playback, basedonthenotemessagesreceived via T tion” onpage200. display tobecalledupinstep4ofthe“BasicOpera- T back viaMIDIReceive Setting theChordType forStylePlay- MIDI Settings he operation procedureisbasicallythesameasthatof hese settingsletyou determinethechord typeforStyle he explanationshereapplytotheCHORDDETECT • ON andOFF. CONFIG 2.SwitchtheDISPLAY VOICE NUMBERmenu CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual •T n operations: [FUNCTION] Y w ues andprogramchange numberyouneed to specify w are shown inthe Voice selectiondisplay. This isuseful Determines whether ornotthe Voice bankandnumber Displaying theVoice ProgramChangeNumber ou cansetthisinthedisplay calledupby thefollowing hen selectingthe Voice fromanexternalMIDIdevice. hen you want tocheck which bankselectMSB/LSBval- c that numbersystemstartsfrom“0.” actual MIDIprogram change numbersareonelower, since F hange numbersare notshown). he numbersdisplayed herestartfrom“1.” Accordingly the or theGS Voices, thisfeatureisnotavailable (theprogram → [J]UTILITY CHORD DETECTdisplay → T AB [ √ ][ ® ] Troubleshooting

- There is a slight difference in sound quality among Overall different notes played on the keyboard. The instrument does not turn on. - Some Voices have a looping sound. • Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the - Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher instrument, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. pitches, depending upon the voice. •This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sam- A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on pling system. or off. • Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played is normal. in the upper or lower registers. •This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. • Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile The Main display does not appear even when turning phone, or use it further away from the instrument. the power on. •This may occur if a USB storage device has been The letters in the display cannot be read, because the installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB stor- display is too bright (or dark). age device may result a long interval between turning • Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum the power on and appearance of the Main display. To visibility. avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the • Adjust the brightness of the display (page 19). device.

The overall volume is too low, or, no sound is heard. The main background image from the CD-ROM is not •The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an displayed. appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. •This is because the Main display is loaded prior to load- •The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. ing of the image from the CD-ROM. To remedy this, Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40). copy the image data from the CD-ROM to the User dis- • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 109). play, then set it as the main background image (page 19). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. (This happens when the speaker setting is set to “HEADPHONE SW”; page 17.) Unplug the headphones. Pedals • Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 17). •The Fade-In and Fade-Out function is on, muting the The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do not sound. To turn it off, press the pedal to which you work for the relevant pedals. assigned the Fade In/Out function. •The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON pedal cord plug into the proper jack (page 211, 214). (page 202). • Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. Not all simultaneously played notes sound. Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUS- TAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 191). •You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 217) of the instrument. When the maximum • Make sure the Registration Sequence function is set to polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will OFF (page 135). stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound.

The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style Files/Folders playback volume. •The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40). •The language settings have been changed. Set the appro- Keys do not sound at the proper pitch. priate language for the file/folder name (page 18). • Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on An existing file is not shown. the operation display (page 43). •The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. or deleted. Manually rename the file, adding the appro- The Scale parameter has probably been set to some- priate extension, on a computer. thing other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of

The data contained in the USB storage device is not Appendix the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the shown on the instrument itself. Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 84). • Data ﬁles with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument. Rename the ﬁle, reducing the number of characters to 50 or less.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 205 • Adjust the sound using the [8π†] (TOTAL GAIN ADJ.) Demo buttons from the display shown in step 6 of “Editing and How can I stop the demo? Saving the selected EQ” (page 95) , if you are using the Master EQ. • Press the [EXIT] button. • Some filter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display (page 101) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. Voice • Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the Filter display of the Mixing Console. Adjust the Har- The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display monic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display does not sound. (page 90). • Check whether or not the selected part is turned on The sound does not change when replacing Voices (page 79). with the Song Auto Revoice feature. •To select the Voice for the right-hand key range, make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] • Depending on the particular Song data, there are some buttons are off. For the Voice to be layered in the right- instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect, even hand range, press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] when replacing Voices. button. To select the Voice for the left-hand key range, The sound of the Voice doesn’t change, even when press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button. editing the Voice. A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The •Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. may not make much change in the actual sound depend- •The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and ing on the original settings of the Voice. both parts are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts. be selected for Step recording. The sound seems strange or different than expected •This is normal. when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the Style or Song from the Mixer. • When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum Style kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are Style playback does not start. reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore • Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you button. can restore the original sound by returning to the begin- • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is ning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the set to “INTERNAL” (page 202). case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again. Only the rhythm channel plays. Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute • Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned Voice. on; press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. •This is normal; Tremolo and Trill settings in the Harmony/ •You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices. keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard. The Harmony function does not operate. Styles cannot be selected. • Harmony cannot be used with the AI Fingered or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate finger- • If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or ing mode (page 107). greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be ready by the instrument. When a Voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings, which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice •You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating Set parameters are turned on (page 106). the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fin- gered Mode” of the separate Data List. The Voice produces excessive noise. •You may be playing the keys according to a different fin- • Certain Voices may produce noise, depending on the gering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FIL- the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according TER page of the Mixing Console display (page 90). to the selected mode (page 108).

Appendix The sound is distorted or noisy. Synchro Stop cannot be turned on. •The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all • Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the ﬁngering relevant volume settings are appropriate. mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” or •This may be caused by certain effects. Try canceling all when Style On/Off is set to off. Make sure the ﬁngering unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard” or “Al (page 92). Full Keyboard” and set Style On/Off to on.

206 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regard- When using the Freeze function of the Registration less of the split point or where chords are played on Memory, the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not the keyboard. change even when changing the Registration Mem- •This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Key- ory setting. board” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is •The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of group. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If Freeze setting display (page 133). desired, select a different ﬁngering mode (page 108). Even though a Registration Memory setting contain- When playing back one Style and selecting another, ing a User/USB voice is selected, the File Selection dis- the newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper play shows a Preset Voice. Tempo. •This is normal; even with the Preset Voice shown, the •You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be actual sounding Voice is the selected User/USB Voice. called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO When a User/USB Voice is saved to the User/USB drive, parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function. the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the source Preset Voice itself, and 2) the parameter settings Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registra- playback. tion Memory setting containing a User/USB Voice, the This is because Song playback has priority. The two ways instrument selects the Preset voice (on which the User/ shown below let you play back a Style and Song simulta- USB Voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter neously. settings to it—so that your original User/USB Voice is • Set the Song to Synchro Start standby, then start the sounded. Style. • Start the Style playback after playing back a Song.

The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong Song or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a Style or a Voice after selecting a Song. Songs cannot be selected. •The level balance of the Parts can change and unex- •This may be because the language settings have been pected sounds can be produced because of the effects changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song file applied to each Part. name. • If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature. too large to be read by the instrument. •The selected section is set to record enable. Release the Song playback does not start. recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1†]– [8†] button in the recording channel display (TAB [√] • “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH). sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection display (page 35). The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel • Make sure to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Edit. •The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. •This is normal; BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the cannot be edited. SONG [STOP] button. • In the case a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original file may not be in the same Registration memory folder. It cannot be played back unless the original file (showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song The Song/Style registered to the Registration Mem- name) is in the same folder. ory cannot be called up. • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been • If the registered Song/Style is contained on USB storage applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the device and the USB storage device is not inserted or Song name), the original file name may have been connected to the instrument, the Song/Style cannot be changed. Rename the file with the original file name (so called up. Insert or connect the appropriate USB storage that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song device containing the Song/Style data. name). The order for calling up Registration Memory settings • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Appendix display. Song name), the file icon may have been changed. Songs to which write-protect has been applied cannot be •The bank containing the Registration has not been played back when the file icon of the original has been selected. Select the appropriate bank (page 132). changed. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 202).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 207 Song playback stops before the Song is ﬁnished. The lamps in the chord section of the keyboard light. •The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback •The Guide function for chords (page 50) has been is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the enabled. Turn the Style off by pressing the [ACMP ON/ [GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function. OFF] button.

The Song last selected before turning off the power is The Guide lamps do not indicate how to play chords. no longer available. • Make sure that the Guide Mode is set to “FollowLights” • If the Song last selected before turning off the power is (page 50). contained in USB storage device, you’ll need to reinsert/ •You cannot check how to play chords with the Guide reconnect the same USB storage device to call up the lamps if the chord fingering method is set to “Single Fin- Song again. ger,” “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” Select another fingering method (page 108). The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing the [REW]/[FF] buttons. •This happens when playing back music data for which a Score specific, fixed tempo is set. When displaying the music score, long notes that In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set. have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are •The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after not displayed correctly. setting the A point. • Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be shown in the music score display exactly as they were When playing back a Song, some channels do not entered. Selecting “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button play. before inputting each note in the Step Record display • Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn (page 149) may solve the problem. playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 143). The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed correctly. A Song to which write-protect has been applied • Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data, name) cannot be moved to external media such as a the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be SmartMedia card or floppy disk. displayed correctly. •A Song to which write-protect has been applied cannot be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia/ The note name partially obscures the note in the dis- floppy disk, etc. Use the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal to play. move the song to a USB flash memory device connected • When several notes occur close to each other, the note to this instrument. name may obscure the note at left.

The Tuning Curve of the piano Voice does not quite The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is match that of other instruments’ Voices. not displayed. •The Tuning Curve designed especially for piano Voices •The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the may not sound with the appropriate pitches when used right-hand and left-hand parts. Set RIGHT and LEFT to with other instrument Voices. Set the Tuning Curve to the appropriate channels (page 39). “FLAT” (page 100). The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle of a measure starting on the next line. • When all the notes of a measure cannot ﬁt on one line, Guide the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to the next line. The melody still plays back, even when specifying Track 1 as the part to be muted for one-handed practice. Dotted notes are indicated as rests. •A part other than the melody part has been assigned to •This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to rests. Track 1 (page 142). Chords are not displayed. The Guide lamps do not light during Song playback, • If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords even after pressing the [GUIDE] button. are not displayed. • Make sure to turn on the Guide lamps (page 141). •Any notes outside of the 88-key range cannot be indicated by the Guide lamps.

Appendix The Guide lamps light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch. •The Guide lamps sometimes light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch depending on the selected Voice.

208 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Lyrics (Karaoke) Microphone/Vocal harmony

Lyrics are not displayed. The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. • If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are •The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by not displayed. Song/Style recording. Use the USB Audio Recorder function (page 60). Furthermore, you can connect a recorder Some of the lyrics overlap each other. to the output terminals [AUX OUT, AUX OUT (LEVEL •This happens for Songs containing many lyrics. FIXED) and record the microphone signal.

The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed. Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone • When the background color is speciﬁed in the song sound. data, the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed. •Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 57).

The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-of- Performance assistant technology tune. Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous Performance assistant technology does not work sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In appropriately. particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal • Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop Song playback, Harmony. To remedy this: then set the [ACMP ON/OFF] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. to off. Finally, restart the Song. • Use a directional microphone. •Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume control (page 40). Video out/RGB out • Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possible. The instrument display contents cannot be sent via • Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the video out/RGB out and do not show on an external MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 171). monitor. • Raise the microphone input level (TH) via the Com- • Make sure that the NTSC/PAL/RGB setting corresponds pressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING dis- to the standard of your particular equipment (page 56). play (page 172). Some ﬂashing parallel lines appear in the TV, video, Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the or computer monitor. Vocal Harmony feature. • Occasionally some ﬂashing parallel lines may appear in • Make sure you are using the appropriate method to the television, video, or computer. This does not neces- specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Har- sarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. For mony mode (page 173). optimum results, try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself.

The monitor you are using may not show the instru- USB Audio Recorder ment's display contents as expected. •Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as rec- The message “This drive is busy now.” appeared, and ommended, the monitor you are using may not show the then the recording was aborted. instrument's display contents as expected (e.g., the dis- • Make sure to use a compatible USB flash memory play contents may not fit on the screen, the characters (page 22). may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incor- • Make sure that the USB flash memory has enough mem- rect). ory (page 195). • If you are using a USB flash memory to which data has already been recorded, check first that no important data remains on the device, then format it (page 68) and try recording again. Appendix

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 209 Appendix 210 1 • •P following: In ordertooptimizetheiAFCeffect,pleaseobserve the stay (page16). ness ofthesoundwhen you openthelidwithlonger Clavinova, enhancingthereverberation andspacious- from thespeakerlocatedonbottomfaceof mental Active Field Control)effect. This producessound T •T • • • • he CVP-409grand pianotypefeaturesaniAFC(Instru- Be suretotightenallscrewsuponcompletingtheassem- Be suretousethecorrectscrewsize,asindicatedbelow. Assembly shouldbecarriedoutbyatleasttwopersons. Be carefulnottoconfuseparts,andbesureinstallall below. bly ofeachunit. Use ofincorrectscrewscandamagethestand. dance withthesequencegivenbelow. parts inthecorrectorientation.Pleaseassembleaccor- CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409 grand pianotype:Keyboard StandAssembly of theClavinova. Do notblock thespeakerlocatedonbottomface each timeyou re-locatetheClavinova. (page176) the power oftheClavinova forthe firsttime,andafter o disassemble,reversetheassemblysequencegiven AC erform theautomaticadjustmentafteryou turnon CAUTION pwrcr Cordholder power cord parts shownintheillustrationareincluded. Remove allpartsfromthebox.Confirmthat esPdlbx6 Pedal box Legs Have aPhillips-head(+)screwdriver ready. TIP Main unit w Lean theunitagainst all asshown atright. 6 × × screws screws 20 mmfixing 40 mmfixing × × 4 12 ment andthewall fromscratches. Place asoftclothagainstthewall toprotecttheinstru- against thewall sothattheunitwillnotfallorslip. and thekeyboardsideonbottomleanunit Place theunitonclothwithkeycover closed Spread alargesoftcloth,such asablanket,onthefloor. How topositionthemainunit with floor. that itsbottomisincontact Do notpositionthemainunitso down onthefloor. Do notlaythemainunitupside the rearsidefacingdown. Do notplacethemainunitwith Be carefulnottopinchyourfingers. CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Be suretopositionthekeyboard sideonthebottom. Incorrect Incorrect Incorrect 2 Attach two front legs and a rear leg. 3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side faces of the legs. front (toward the keyboard). If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it. Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try again. 4 Rear leg Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown in the illustration below, then use the cord holder to affix the pedal cord. Front leg Front leg 3

Install and tighten four 6 x 40 mm screws on each leg, starting with one of the front legs.

4 3 Install the pedal box. 1 Remove the twist tie that afﬁxes the pedal cord to the upper portion of the pedal box.

4 Raising the unit to the standing position. Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.

CAUTION • Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers. •When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover. Twist tie

2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit, and attach the pedal box using four 6 x 20 mm screws. Appendix

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 211 5 Connect the power cord. After completing the assembly, please check the follow- Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC INLET]. ing.

• Are there any parts left over?

→ 240 Review the assembly procedure and correct any For models that feature errors. 110 a voltage selector:

220 Set the voltage selector to an • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other 127 appropriate voltage. movable fixtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Right leg on the bottom of the main unit, when → Check the connection. viewed from front • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, Voltage Selector refer to the assembly diagrams and Before connecting the AC power cord, check the set- retighten all screws. ting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for When moving the instrument after assembly, always your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. hold the bottom of the main unit. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is CAUTION initially shipped. Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper han- After the proper voltage has been selected, connect dling can result in damage to the instrument or personal the AC power cord to the [AC INLET] and an AC wall injury. outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some Top portion areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. Key cover Do not hold here. Do not hold here. 6 Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Appendix

212 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409/407: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all • Do not place the main unit parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor- with the rear side facing dance with the sequence given below. down. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. Incorrect • Be sure to tighten up Have a Phillips-head (+) screw- • Do not lay the main unit all screws upon com- upside-down on the ﬂoor. pleting assembly of driver ready. each unit. •To disassemble, Incorrect reverse the assembly sequence given below. 3 Attach the front legs. 1 Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. Front leg (right) Front leg (left) CAUTION To prevent the 1 Fix the front right 2 Fix the front right leg key cover from leg to the bottom to the speaker box accidentally surface of the unit using two screws. opening during using two screws. assembly, press down on the Front leg (left) Rear leg Front leg (right) key cover, making sure that the sheet (shown) remain in place.

Pedal box Bundled pedal 3 Fix the front left leg in the same way. cord inside If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and adjust the position of the front leg.

AC power cord 5x18 mm ﬁxing × screws 14 4 Attach the rear leg. 2 Fix the rear legs to the speaker box using two screws. 2 With the key cover closed and the keyboard side on the bottom, lean the unit against the wall. 1 Fix the rear legs to the bottom surface of the unit using CAUTION two screws. Please do not touch the speaker net. Doing so may damage the If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and speaker inside. adjust the position of the rear legs. Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the floor. 5 Raising the unit to the standing position. Place the unit on the cloth with the keyboard side on Use the front legs as support to raise the unit. the bottom and lean the unit against the wall so that the CAUTION unit will not fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the • Be careful not to pinch your fingers. wall to protect the instrument and wall from scratches. •When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover. CAUTION • Be careful not to pinch your fingers. • The top part of the music rest is not fixed. When you lean

the unit against the wall, support the music rest with your Appendix hand so that the music rest will not fall.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 213 6 Installing the pedal box. 8 Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. 1 Remove the 2 Untie and straighten plastic cover from out the bundled the rear legs. cord attached to the bottom of the pedal

box. 240

110 (the bottom of the right side 220 127 as seen from the front)

Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin config- 3 Pass the pedal uration of the AC wall outlets in your area. cord between the pedal box WARNING and the rear leg. An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the instrument or result in improper operation. 4 Make sure that the pedal box lays flat, with no gap between itself and the floor, then affix the pedal box using two screws. 9 Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it Connect the pedal cord. comes in firm contact with 7 the floor surface. 1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector. ■ After completing the assembly, please check Insert the plug with the the following. arrow-printed side facing front (toward the keyboard side). • Are there any parts left over? If the plug will not go in easily, → Review the assembly procedure and correct any do not force it. Double-check errors. the orientation of the plug, then try again. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the instrument to an appropriate location. 2 Align the pedal cord into the groove on the rear leg, • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when Correct and install the plastic cover you shake it? onto the groove. Be careful → Tighten all screws. not to insert the cover’s Incorrect attachment strip between • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you the groove wall and the leg. step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection. Appendix

214 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion

Do not hold here.

Key cover

Do not hold here. Hold here. Appendix

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 215 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)

The floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. For a list of optional floppy disk drives available for this instrument, see “Optional Accesso- ries” (page 218).

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

1 Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and ﬁt the ﬂoppy disk 3 Attach the drive and case assembly to the left drive into the case. underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).

Insert the drive to the case, with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case.

4 Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Dual-sided adhesive tape

2 Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. Appendix

216 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Speciﬁcations

CVP-409GP CVP-409 CVP-407 (grand piano type) Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling NW (Natural Wood) NW (Natural Wood) Keyboard Keyboard with Synthetic ivory keytops (Wood is used for the white (Wood is used for the white keys) keys) Number of keys 88 Display 640 ✕ 480 dots VGA color 7.8 inch LCD Music Score, Lyrics, and YES Text Wallpaper Customize YES Polyphony (max) 128 + 128 590 voices + 480 XG Voices Voice Selection 19 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS (GS Voices for GS Song playback) Natural! Voice 38 S. Articulation! 38 Voice Voice Mega Voice 18 Live! Voice 56 Cool! Voice 39 Sweet! Voice 23 Organ Flutes! 10 Regular Voice 368 Sound Creator YES Reverb/ Chorus/DSP/ 9 Effect Master Blocks Compressor Microphone 1 Reverb: 34 Preset + 3 User Reverb/ Chorus: 30 Preset + 3 User Effects Chorus/DSP DSP 1: 191 Preset + 3 User Effect DSP 2–6: 191 Preset + 10 User Types Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User Master 5 Preset + 5 User Compressor Part EQ 27 Parts Vocal Harmony 60 Preset + 10 User Accompaniment Styles 408 Pro Styles 334 Session 38 Styles Pianist Styles 36 Mega Voice Styles YES Accompani Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Fingering ment Style Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Style Creator YES OTS 4 for Each Style (One Touch Setting) OTS Link YES Music Preset YES Finder Edit YES

Preset Songs 120 Appendix Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Vocal CueTIME Guide Lamp YES Performance assistant Song YES technology Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Record 16 Channels

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 217 CVP-409GP CVP-409 CVP-407 (grand piano type) USB Audio Recorder YES LAN Port, Wireless Game Adaptor (LAN Port), Internet Direct Connection External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) USB Flash Memory YES Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) Memory Hard Disk External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) Device Flash Memory (Internal) about 3.2 MB Memory Card External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) (SmartMedia, etc.) Tempo Range 5–500, Tap Tempo Tempo Metronome YES Sound Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 Languages) Buttons 8 Registration Regist. Sequence/ Memory YES Freeze Demo YES Language for Display 6 Languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian) Direct Access YES Others Piano Reset Button YES (incl. Piano Lock) Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master Scale Type 9 USB to HOST YES (Computer) USB TO DEVICE USB YES (left side of front panel) Connection USB TO DEVICE (bottom left panel of the YES instrument) PHONES x 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R, R), Other Connectors AUX OUT (L/L+R, R), AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L, R), MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./LINE IN), VIDEO OUT, RGB OUT, LAN VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, S. Articulation, Pedals Functions SONG PLAY/PAUSE, STYLE START/STOP, etc. iAFC YES Ampliﬁers/ Ampliﬁers 60 W ✕ 2 + 20 W ✕ 2 Speakers Speakers (16 cm + 5 cm + 3 cm (dome)) ✕ 2 + 10 cm ✕ 2 Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] 1435 mm ✕ 1147 mm ✕ 905 mm 1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 890 mm 1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 885 mm (CVP-409 grand piano type: Lid up) [56-5/8" ✕ 45-1/4" ✕ 35-3/4"] [56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 35-1/8"] [56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 34-7/8"] (CVP-409 and CVP-407: with the Music (1435 mm ✕ 1147 mm ✕ 1555 mm) (1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 1047 mm) (1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 1042 mm) Rest) [56-5/8" ✕ 45-1/4" ✕ 61-3/8"] [56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 41-3/8"] [56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 41-1/8"] Weight 108 kg (238 lbs., 1-1/2 oz) 86 kg (189 lbs., 9-1/2 oz) 84 kg (185 lbs., 3 oz) Headphones HPE-160 Optional FootSwitch FC 4/FC 5 Accessories Foot Controller FC 7 USB-FDD Unit UD-FD01

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix

218 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Index

Symbols E

® ...... 65 EDIT ...... 121 √ ...... 65 Edit (Bookmarks) ...... 182 Edit (Effect) ...... 93 Numerics Edit (EQ) ...... 95 Edit (Lyrics) ...... 158 1–16 ...... 148, 158 Edit (Master Compressor) ...... 98 Edit (Music Finder) ...... 114 A Edit (OTS) ...... 51 Edit (Song) ...... 158 A-B Repeat ...... 41 Edit (Style) ...... 123 AI ...... 108 Edit (Vocal Harmony) ...... 167 AI FINGERED ...... 108 Edit (Voice) ...... 99 AI FULL KEYBOARD ...... 108 EFFECT ...... 90 Any key ...... 142 Effect (microphone) ...... 56 ARABIC ...... 85 Effect (Voice) ...... 86 Assembly ...... 210, 213 Effect Return Level ...... 94 ASSEMBLY (Style) ...... 122 Effect Type ...... 92 Audio Recorder ...... 60 EFFECT/EQ ...... 102 Auto Accompaniment Feature ...... 44 Entering characters ...... 73 AUTO REVOICE SETUP ...... 91 Entering Characters (Internet Direct Connection) ...... 178 EQ (Equalizer) ...... 91 B EQUAL TEMPERAMENT ...... 85 ESEQ ...... 199 Background (Lyrics) ...... 55 EXIT ...... 67 Backup ...... 76 BASIC ...... 118 F BASS ...... 203 BOOKMARK ...... 180 F ...... 65 Brightness ...... 19 Factory Reset ...... 74 Browser ...... 184 Factory-programmed Settings ...... 74 FADE IN/OUT (Song) ...... 137 C Fade In/Out time ...... 137 FADE IN/OUT/HOLD TIME ...... 109 Calibrating the iAFC settings ...... 83 Fast forward ...... 138 Chain Playback ...... 138 Favorite ...... 114 CHANNEL ...... 126, 158 File ...... 66 CHANNEL ON/OFF ...... 109 File Selection Display ...... 26, 68 Characters ...... 73 File Selection Display Basic Operation ...... 67 CHORD ...... 148, 158 File Selection Display Configuration ...... 66 CHORD DETECT ...... 204 File/Folder Operations ...... 68 CHORD FINGERING ...... 107 FILTER ...... 90, 165 Chord Tutor function ...... 49 FINGERED ...... 108 CMP ...... 91 FINGERED ON BASS ...... 108 COMMON ...... 100 FOLDER ...... 72 CONFIG 1 ...... 31, 47, 109, 132 Folder ...... 66 CONFIG 2 ...... 17, 19, 204 Follow lights ...... 142 Contrast ...... 18 Foot Controller ...... 30 CONTROLLER ...... 100 Cool! ...... 78 COPY ...... 70 CUT ...... 71 D

Damper Pedal ...... 30 DELETE ...... 71 Demo ...... 23 -For information on the panel controls, see “Panel Appendix Demo (Voice) ...... 34 Controls” on page 12. Direct Access ...... 64 -For information on the jacks and connectors DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) ...... 199 located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using Drums ...... 78 Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 189. DSP ...... 86 -For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet DSP/DSP VARIATION ...... 86 Terms” on page 188. DUAL ...... 79 -For information on the parameters in the tab dis- DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect ...... 82 plays, refer to the tab names in this index.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 219 FOOTAGE ...... 104, 105 MEAN-TONE ...... 85 Footage ...... 105 MEDIA ...... 68, 140, 195 Footswitch ...... 30 Mega Voice ...... 78 Format ...... 68 MELODIC MINOR ...... 129 FREEZE ...... 133 Messages ...... 63 FULL KEYBOARD ...... 108 microphone ...... 54 Function display ...... 27 MICROPHONE SETTING ...... 170 MIDI ...... 196 G MIDI Settings ...... 200 MIDI Templates ...... 201 GM System Level 1 ...... 199 MIXING CONSOLE ...... 88 GM System Level 2 ...... 199 MONO/POLY ...... 86 GROOVE ...... 124 MULTI FINGER ...... 108 GS ...... 199 Multi track recording ...... 143 Guide ...... 141 Music Finder ...... 52 Guide Lamp ...... 39 Music Rest ...... 16 GUIDE LAMP ON/OFF ...... 141 GUIDE LAMP TIMING ...... 142 N H NAME ...... 72 Natural! ...... 78 H ...... 65 Notation ...... 38 HARMONY ...... 103 NW (Natural Wood) ...... 10 HARMONY/ECHO ...... 86 Headphone Hanger ...... 17 O Headphones ...... 17 Home Page ...... 186 One Touch Setting ...... 50 Hz ...... 84 One-Handed Practice ...... 39 Organ Flutes ...... 103 I Organ Flutes! ...... 78 Others ...... 185 iAFC ...... 82 OTS Link ...... 51 ICON ...... 72 OTS Link Timing ...... 110 Initialize ...... 74 OVERALL SETTING ...... 171 Initializing Internet Settings ...... 187 OWNER ...... 18, 19, 20 Internet Direct Connection ...... 176 Owner Name ...... 20 Internet Settings ...... 183 P K PANEL PART ...... 89 Karaoke ...... 54 PARAMETER ...... 127 Karao-key ...... 142 Part ...... 79 key cover ...... 14 PASTE ...... 70, 71 Keyboard Parts ...... 79 Pause ...... 138 KEYBOARD/PANEL ...... 29, 58 PEDAL ...... 191 KIRNBERGER ...... 85 pedal polarity ...... 191 pedals ...... 30 L percussion sounds ...... 34 performance assistant technology ...... 43 LAN ...... 184 Phrase Mark ...... 138 LAN port ...... 176, 196 PHRASE MARK REPEAT ...... 138 Language ...... 18 Pianist ...... 107 Left ...... 79 PIANO ...... 100 Left Pedal ...... 30 Piano Lock ...... 29 Lid (CVP-409 grand piano type) ...... 16 Portamento ...... 86 Live! ...... 78 Portamento Time ...... 100 Live!Drums ...... 78 Practice Function ...... 141 Live!SFX ...... 78 PRESET ...... 26 LYRICS ...... 158 Pro ...... 107 Lyrics ...... 55 PROPERTY ...... 195

Appendix Prot. 1 ...... 70 M Prot. 2 Edit ...... 70 Prot. 2 Orig ...... 70 Main Display ...... 25, 65 Punch In/Out Recording ...... 159 MAIN PICTURE ...... 19 PURE MAJOR ...... 85 Master Compressor ...... 97 PURE MINOR ...... 85 MASTER TUNE ...... 84 PYTHAGOREAN ...... 85

220 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual Q Sweet! ...... 78 Synchro Start (Song) ...... 137 QUANTIZE ...... 126 Synchro Start (Style) ...... 47 Quick Recording ...... 143 Synchro Stop ...... 48 QUICK START ...... 139 Synchro Stop Window ...... 110 Synthetic ivory keytops ...... 10 R SYS/EX...... 158 SYSTEM ...... 202 RANDOM ...... 138 SYSTEM RESET ...... 75 Realtime Recording ...... 118 REC ...... 65 T REC MODE ...... 158 RECEIVE ...... 203 TALK ...... 59 Record (Song) ...... 42, 143 TALK SETTING ...... 174 Record (Style) ...... 118 Tap function ...... 137 REGISTRATION MEMORY ...... 131 Text ...... 55 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ...... 134 Threshold ...... 98 REPEAT MODE ...... 36, 138 Top ...... 138 Repeat Playback ...... 138 TRANSMIT ...... 202 Repeat Playback Function ...... 41 Transpose ...... 56, 58, 84 Repertoire ...... 53 TUNE ...... 90 Revoice ...... 91 Rewind ...... 138 U [RGB OUT] Terminal ...... 190 Right 1 ...... 79 UP ...... 67 Right 2 ...... 79 USB Audio Recorder ...... 60 [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal ...... 195 S USER ...... 26 S. Articulation! ...... 78 V SAVE ...... 69 Save (Music Finder) ...... 115 Vibrato ...... 102 SCALE TUNE ...... 84 VIDEO OUT ...... 56 Score ...... 38 Vocal CueTIME ...... 142 Search (Music Finder Records) ...... 112 VOCAL HARMONY EDIT ...... 168, 169 Section Set ...... 110 VOCAL HARMONY TYPE ...... 167 Session ...... 107 Voice ...... 28, 32, 78 Set the polarity of the pedal ...... 191 VOICE EFFECT ...... 86 SFX ...... 78 Voice Program Change Number ...... 204 Sheet Music Braces ...... 16 VOICE SET ...... 99 SINGLE FINGER ...... 108 VOL/ATTACK ...... 105 SMF (Standard MIDI file) ...... 199 VOL/VOICE ...... 90 Song ...... 35 SONG CH 1-8/9-16 ...... 89 W Song channels ...... 147 Sostenuto Pedal ...... 30 WERCKMEISTER ...... 85 SOUND ...... 101 Wireless Game Adaptor ...... 176, 188 Sound Creator ...... 99 Wireless LAN ...... 185 sound effects ...... 34 SPATIAL ENSEMBLE Effect ...... 83 X Speaker setting ...... 17 SPLIT ...... 79 XF ...... 199 SPLIT POINT ...... 111 XG ...... 199 Step Recording ...... 118, 143 Stop ACMP ...... 110 Style ...... 44 Style Assembly ...... 118 Style Change Behavior ...... 110 -For information on the panel controls, see “Panel Appendix Style Creator ...... 117 Controls” on page 12. Style File ...... 199 -For information on the jacks and connectors STYLE PART ...... 89 located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using Style parts ...... 147 Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 189. STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT ...... 109 -For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet Style Structure ...... 117 Terms” on page 188. Style Touch ...... 110 -For information on the parameters in the tab displays, refer to the tab names in this index.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 221 Appendix 222 [LYRICS/TEXT] button Left pedal [EXTRA TRACKS] [EXIT] [ENTER] [LCD CONTRAST] L Keyboard guidelamps K [INTERNET] I [GUIDE] G [FUNCTION] F ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] E Damper pedal D [CHANNEL ON/OFF] C [BREAK] B [A]–[J]...... [AUTO FILLIN] ...... [ACMP ON/OFF] A [1 [1]–[8] (REGISTRATIONMEMORY)...... [1]–[4] (ONETOUCHSETTING) Number ...... [–] [+](TRANSPOSE) ...... [–] [+](TEMPO) Symbol T INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] [DUAL (RIGHT2)] Drum Kiticons [DIRECT ACCESS] [DEMO]...... [DATA ENTRY] he positionofthebuttononpanelcanbeconfirmed by thePanel Control(page 12). π† CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual P anel ButtonChart ...... ]–[8 ...... π† ...... ] ...... O e a Q q J t S E N K A 0 k n 6 8 Y f X s D B V L 4 p R [SYNC STOP] [SYNC START] STYLE categoryselectionbuttons...... [STOP] ...... [START/STOP] [MUSIC FINDER] [SPLIT (LEFT)] [REW]/[FF] buttons [MIXING CONSOLE] Mic signal/overlamps...... [REPEAT] Sostenuto pedal [POWER] [MEMORY] [TRACK 2(L)] REGIST BANK[+][–] [USER]...... [USB TODEVICE] [SONG SELECT] [PLAY/PAUSE] [MASTER VOLUME] [TRACK 1(R)] ...... [TAP TEMPO](TEMPO) [REC] R [PIANO RESET] P [OTS LINK] ...... [ON/OFF] (METRONOME) O MAIN VARIATION[A]/[B]/[C]/[D] M [VOICE EFFECT] VOICE categoryselectionbuttons...... V [USB] U TAB [ T [SCORE] S √ ...... ][ ...... ® ...... ] ...... F G 9 \ I H ^ M W g u r 1 j b i 3 Z ] c [ h o C m U 2 T d 7 P 5 l The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for fifty Chim Chim Cher-ee seven (57) of the songs pre-installed in this instrument: from Walt Disney’s MARY POPPINS Words and Music by Richard M. Sherman and Robert B. Sherman Alfie © 1963 Wonderland Music Company, Inc. Theme from the Paramount Picture ALFIE Copyright Renewed Words by Hal David All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Music by Burt Bacharach Copyright © 1966 (Renewed 1994) by Famous Music Corporation Do-Re-Mi International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II All Shook Up Music by Richard Rodgers Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley Copyright © 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright © 1957 by Shalimar Music Corporation Copyright Renewed Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through- All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis out the world Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Don’t Be Cruel (To A Heart That’s True) Beauty And The Beast Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Copyright © 1956 by Unart Music Corporation and Elvis Presley Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music, Inc. Music by Alan Menken Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music © 1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Com- All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis pany, Inc. Songs All Rights Reserved Used by Permission International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Bésame Mucho (Kiss Me Much) Edelweiss Music and Spanish Words by Consuelo Velazquez from THE SOUND OF MUSIC English Words by Sunny Skylar Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright © 1941, 1943 by Promotora Hispano Americana de Musica, Music by Richard Rodgers S.A. Copyright © 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyrights Renewed Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Peer International Corporation WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through- International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved out the world Blue Hawaii International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved from the Paramount Picture WAIKIKI WEDDING Fly Me To The Moon (In Other Words) Words and Music by Leo Robin and Ralph Rainger featured in the Motion Picture ONCE AROUND Copyright © 1936, 1937 (Renewed 1963, 1964) by Famous Music Words and Music by Bart Howard Corporation TRO - © Copyright 1954 (Renewed) Hampshire House Publishing International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Corp., New York, NY Blue Moon International Copyright Secured Words by Lorenz Hart All Rights Reserved Including Public Performance For Profit Music by Richard Rodgers Used by Permission © 1934 (Renewed 1962) METRO-GOLDWYN-MAYER INC. Hey Jude All Rights Controlled by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC. (Publishing) Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney and WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print) Copyright © 1968 Sony/ATV Songs LLC All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Copyright Renewed Brazil All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Words and Music by Ray Barroso Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 English lyrics by S. K. Russell International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1941 by Peer International Corporation Hound Dog Copyright Renewed Words and Music by Jerry Leiber and Mike Stoller International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1956 by Elvis Presley Music, Inc. and Lion Publishing California Girls Co., Inc. Words and Music by Brian Wilson and Mike Love Copyright Renewed, Assigned to Gladys Music and Universal - MCA Copyright © 1965 IRVING MUSIC, INC. Music Publishing, A Division of Universal Studios, Inc. Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Inc. and Chrysalis Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Can You Feel The Love Tonight from Walt Disney Pictures’ THE LION KING I Just Called To Say I Love You Music by Elton John Words and Music by Stevie Wonder Lyrics by Tim Rice © 1984 JOBETE MUSIC CO., INC. and BLACK BULL MUSIC © 1994 Wonderland Music Company, Inc. c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. All Rights Reserved Used by Permission All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per- mission Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII I Left My Heart In San Francisco Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Cre- Words by Douglass Cross atore Music by George Cory Copyright © 1961 by Gladys Music, Inc. © 1954 (Renewed 1982) COLGEMS-EMI MUSIC INC. Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Gladys Music All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per- All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, mission Inc. and Chrysalis Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 223 In The Mood Moon River By Joe Garland from the Paramount Picture BREAKFAST AT TIFFANY’S Copyright © 1939, 1960 Shapiro, Bernstein & Co., Inc., New York Words by Johnny Mercer Copyright Renewed Music by Henry Mancini International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1961 (Renewed 1989) by Famous Music Corporation Used by Permission International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Isn’t She Lovely Moonlight Serenade Words and Music by Stevie Wonder Words by Mitchell Parish © 1976 JOBETE MUSIC CO., INC. and BLACK BULL MUSIC Music by Glen Miller c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. Copyright © 1939 (Renewed 1967) by ROBBINS MUSIC CORPORA- All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per- TION mission All Rights Controlled and Administered by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC. Let It Be International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1970 Sony/ATV Songs LLC My Favorite Things Copyright Renewed from THE SOUND OF MUSIC All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 Music by Richard Rodgers International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed Let’s Twist Again WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through- Words by Kal Mann out the world Music by Dave Appell and Kal Mann International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1961 Kalmann Music, Inc. Copyright Renewed My Way All Rights Controlled and Administered by Spirit Two Music, Inc. By Paul Anka, Jacques Revaux, Claude Francois and Giles Thibault (ASCAP) © 1997 by Chrysalis Standards, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Used by Permission. All Rights Reserved. Linus And Lucy The Nearness Of You By Vince Guaraldi from the Paramount Picture ROMANCE IN THE DARK Copyright © 1965 LEE MENDELSON FILM PRODUCTIONS, INC. Words by Ned Washington Copyright Renewed Music by Hoagy Carmichael International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1937, 1940 (Renewed 1964, 1967) by Famous Music Corporation Love Story International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Theme from the Paramount Picture LOVE STORY Music by Francis Lai Theme From “New York, New York” Copyright © 1970, 1971 (Renewed 1998, 1999) by Famous Music Music by John Kander Corporation Words by Fred Ebb International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved © 1977 UNITED ARTISTS CORPORATION All Rights Controlled by EMI UNART CATALOG INC. (Publishing) and Lullaby Of Birdland WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print) Words by George David Weiss All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Music by George Shearing © 1952, 1954 (Renewed 1980, 1982) EMI LONGITUDE MUSIC Ob-La-Di, Ob-La-Da All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per- Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney mission Copyright © 1968 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed Michelle All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 Copyright © 1965 Sony/ATV Songs LLC International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Proud Mary Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 Words and Music by J.C. Fogerty International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved © 1968 (Renewed) JONDORA MUSIC All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Mickey Mouse March from Walt Disney’s THE MICKEY MOUSE CLUB Return To Sender Words and Music by Jimmie Dodd Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Winﬁeld Scott © 1955 Walt Disney Music Company Copyright © 1962 by Elvis Presley Music, Inc. Copyright Renewed Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Reserved Used by Permission All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis Songs Mission: Impossible Theme International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved from the Paramount Television Series MISSION: IMPOSSIBLE By Lalo Schifrin The Shoop Shoop Song (It’s In His Kiss) Copyright © 1966, 1967 (Renewed 1994, 1995) by Bruin Music Com- Words and Music by Rudy Clark pany Copyright © 1963, 1964 by Trio Music Company, Inc. and Top Of The International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Charts Copyright Renewed Mona Lisa All Rights for the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A. Music Company, Inc. Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans All Rights for the World excluding the United States Controlled and Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation Administered by Trio Music Company, Inc. and Alley Music Corp. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Used by Permission

224 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual (Sittin’ On) The Dock Of The Bay That’s Amore (That’s Love) Words and Music by Steve Cropper and Otis Redding from the Paramount Picture THE CADDY Copyright © 1968, 1975 IRVING MUSIC, INC. Words by Jack Brooks Copyright Renewed Music by Harry Warren All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Copyright © 1953 (Renewed 1981) by Paramount Music Corporation and Four Jays Music Smoke Gets In Your Eyes International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved from ROBERTA Words by Otto Harbach Up Where We Belong Music by Jerome Kern from the Paramount Picture AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN © 1933 UNIVERSAL - POLYGRAM INTERNATIONAL PUBLISHING, Words by Will Jennings INC. Music by Buffy Sainte-Marie and Jack Nitzsche Copyright Renewed Copyright © 1982 by Famous Music Corporation and Ensign Music All Rights Reserved Corporation International Rights Secured. Not for broadcast transmission. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved DO NOT DUPLICATE. NOT FOR RENTAL. Waltz For Debby WARNING: It is a violation of Federal Copyright Law to synchronize Lyric by Gene Lees this Multimedia Disc with video tape or ﬁlm, or to print the Composi- Music by Bill Evans tion(s) embodied on this Multimedia Disc in the form of standard TRO - © Copyright 1964 (Renewed), 1965 (Renewed), 1966 music notation, without the express written permission of the copy- (Renewed) Folkways Music Publishers, Inc., New York, NY right owner. International Copyright Secured Somewhere, My Love All Rights Reserved Including Public Performance For Proﬁt Lara’s Theme from DOCTOR ZHIVAGO Used by Permission Lyric by Paul Francis Webster White Christmas Music by Maurice Jarre from the Motion Picture Irving Berlin’s HOLIDAY INN Copyright © 1965, 1966 (Renewed 1993, 1994) Webster Music Co. Words and Music by Irving Berlin and EMI Robbins Catalog Inc. © Copyright 1940, 1942 by Irving Berlin International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Copyright Renewed Spanish Eyes International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Words by Charles Singleton and Eddie Snyder A Whole New World Music by Bert Kaempfert from Walt Disney’s ALADDIN © 1965, 1966 (Renewed 1993, 1994) EDITION DOMA BERT Music by Alan Menken KAEMPFERT Lyrics by Tim Rice All Rights for the world, excluding Germany, Austria and Switzerland, © 1992 Wonderland Music Company, Inc. and Walt Disney Music Controlled and Administered by SCREEN GEMS-EMI MUSIC INC. Company All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per- All Rights Reserved Used by Permission mission Yesterday Speak Softly, Love (Love Theme) Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney from the Paramount Picture THE GODFATHER Copyright © 1965 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Words by Larry Kusik Copyright Renewed Music by Nino Rota All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Copyright © 1972 (Renewed 2000) by Famous Music Corporation Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Stella By Starlight You Are The Sunshine Of My Life from the Paramount Picture THE UNINVITED Words and Music by Stevie Wonder Words by Ned Washington © 1972 (Renewed 2000) JOBETE MUSIC CO., INC. and BLACK BULL Music by Victor Young MUSIC Copyright © 1946 (Renewed 1973, 1974) by Famous Music Corpora- c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. tion All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per- International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved mission Take The “A” Train You Sexy Thing Words and Music by Billy Strayhorn Words and Music by E. Brown Copyright © 1941; Renewed 1969 DreamWorks Songs (ASCAP) and Copyright © 1975 by Finchley Music Corp. Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. (ASCAP) for the U.S.A. Administered in the USA and Canada by Music & Media International, Rights for DreamWorks Songs and Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. Adminis- Inc. tered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. Administered for the World excluding the USA and Canada by RAK International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Music Publishing Ltd. Tears In Heaven International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Words and Music by Eric Clapton and Will Jennings Copyright © 1992 by E.C. Music Ltd. and Blue Sky Rider Songs All Rights for E.C. Music Ltd. Administered by Unichappell Music Inc. All Rights for Blue Sky Rider Songs Administered by Irving Music, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved That Old Black Magic from the Paramount Picture STAR SPANGLED RHYTHM Words by Johnny Mercer Music by Harold Arlen Copyright © 1942 (Renewed 1969) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual 225 MEMO

226 CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual CVP-409GP (grand piano type) Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol CAUTION within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK “dangerous voltage” within the product’s DO NOT OPEN enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF The exclamation point within an equilateral ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE triangle is intended to alert the user to the PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO presence of important operating and QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the 2Keep these instructions. manufacturer. 3 Heed all warnings. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, 4 Follow all instructions. tripod, bracket, or table 5 Do not use this apparatus near water. specified by the manufacturer, 6 Clean only with dry cloth. or sold with the apparatus. 7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in When a cart is used, use accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. caution when moving the cart/ 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as apparatus combination to radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus avoid injury from tip-over. (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or when unused for long periods of time. grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug Servicing is required when the apparatus has been has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or normally, or has been dropped. pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

(UL60065_03) CVP-409/407 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca- basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. include, but are not limited to, the following: Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe- cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions 9. This product should be used only with the components found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ- supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the ing connection to the main supply. manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are product. manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instruc- extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the storm activity. Special Message Section of this manual. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug exist. into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power spilled into the enclosure through openings; or supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, c. The product has been exposed to rain: or on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone product has been damaged. could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom- 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic- size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the ing should be referred to qualified service personnel. AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro- 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. unobstructed ventilation is required. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces- their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are that produce heat should be avoided. designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula- This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions does not guarantee that interference will not occur tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require- in all installations. If this product is found to be the ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by source of interference, which can be determined by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate use the product. the problem by using one of the following measures: 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces- Relocate either this product or the device that is being sories and/or another product use only high quality affected by the interference. shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail- breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s. ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori- In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient zation to use this product in the USA. the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com- lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac- Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized these requirements provides a reasonable level of to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate assurance that your use of this product in a residential the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo- environment will not result in harmful interference with ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used The above statements apply ONLY to those products according to the instructions found in the users manual, distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its may cause interference harmful to the operation of subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) CVP-409/407 IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT Connecting the Plug and Cord (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America BLUE : NEUTRAL Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 BROWN : LIVE Telephone : 714-522-9011 As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa- Type of Equipment : Electronic Piano ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden- Model Name : CVP-409/407 tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured Operation is subject to the following two conditions: BLACK. 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to 2) this device must accept any interference received including the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured interference that may cause undesired operation. RED. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. * This applies only to products distributed by (FCC DoC) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CVP-409GP (grand piano type)

This product contains a high intensity lamp that con- COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) tains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America considerations. Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 For disposal information in the United States, refer Telephone : 714-522-9011 to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: Type of Equipment : Digital Piano www.eiae.org Model Name : CVP-409GP This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. * This applies only to products distributed by (mercury) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by (FCC DoC) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

NORTH AMERICA THE NETHERLANDS/ ASIA CANADA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, Branch Benelux 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), M1S 3R1, Canada Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 416-298-1311 Tel: 0347-358 040 Tel: 021-6247-2211 U.S.A. FRANCE HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation of America Yamaha Musique France Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, U.S.A. Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 714-522-9011 ITALY Tel: 2737-7688 Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. INDIA CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Tel: 02-935-771 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex MEXICO Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. SPAIN/PORTUGAL Tel: 0124-466-5551 Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Col. Guadalupe del Moral INDONESIA Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 55-5804-0600 PT. Nusantik Tel: 91-639-8888 Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot BRAZIL GREECE Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House Tel: 21-520-2577 Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece KOREA CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 01-228 2160 Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tel: 011-3704-1377 SWEDEN 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, ARGENTINA Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Yamaha Scandinavia AB Tel: 080-004-0022 Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 Sucursal de Argentina S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden MALAYSIA Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Tel: 031 89 34 00 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Madero Este-C1107CEK Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Buenos Aires, Argentina DENMARK Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 011-4119-7000 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Tel: 3-78030900 Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark PHILIPPINES PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN Tel: 44 92 49 00 AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ Yupangco Music Corporation CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES FINLAND 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. F-Musiikki Oy Tel: 819-7551 Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland SINGAPORE Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 09 618511 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. Tel: +507-269-5311 NORWAY #03-11 A-Z Building Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 EUROPE Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 747-4374 THE UNITED KINGDOM Tel: 67 16 77 70 TAIWAN ICELAND Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, Skifan HF Taiwan 104, R.O.C. MK7 8BL, England Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Ice- Tel: 02-2511-8688 Tel: 01908-366700 land Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND IRELAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. Danfay Ltd. RUSSIA 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Yamaha Music (Russia) 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Tel: 01-2859177 Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand GERMANY Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 02-215-2626 Tel: 495 626 0660 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Japan 430-8650 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Tel: +81-53-460-2317 Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland AFRICA Tel: 01-383 3990 OCEANIA Yamaha Corporation, AUSTRIA Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Branch Austria Japan 430-8650 Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 01-60203900 Tel: 3-9693-5111 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ MIDDLE EAST NEW ZEALAND HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Music Works LTD TURKEY/CYPRUS P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH New Zealand Branch Austria, CEE Department Tel: 9-634-0099 Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 01-602039025 Tel: 04101-3030 COUNTRIES AND TRUST OTHER COUNTRIES TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN POLAND Yamaha Corporation, Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Japan 430-8650 Tel: 022-868-07-57 Tel: +81-53-460-2312

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB46 U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WH89980 612APZC?.?-01B0 Printed in Indonesia